Reference Guide

Please read this guide before operating this product.

After you finish reading this guide, store it in a safe place for future reference. ENG
 0

Ot¯

iR2030/iR2025/
iR2022i/iR2018i
Reference Guide
 Manuals for the Machine
The manuals for this machine are divided as follows. Please refer to them for detailed information.
The manuals supplied with optional equipment are included in the list below. Depending on the system
configuration and product purchased, some manuals may not be needed.
Guides with this symbol are PDF manuals included on the
Guides with this symbol are printed manuals. CD-ROM accompanying CD-ROM.

• Quick Reference for Basic Operations

For Basic Operations → Basic Features
For Additional Functions → To Suit Your Needs
Easy Operation Guide CD-ROM

• Basic Information
User’s Guide
• Basic Operations
• Troubleshooting Reference Guide CD-ROM
(This Document)
• Copying Instructions
Copying Guide CD-ROM

• Sending and Fax Instructions

Sending and Facsimile CD-ROM
Guide
• Setting Up the Network Connection and Installing
the CD-ROM Software Network Quick Start Guide
• Remote User Interface Instructions
Remote UI Guide CD-ROM

• Network Connectivity and Setup Instructions

Network Guide CD-ROM

• Color Network ScanGear Installation and

Instructions Color Network ScanGear CD-ROM
User’s Guide
• PCL/UFRII LT Printer Instructions
PCL/UFR II Printer Guide CD-ROM

• UFRII LT Printer Instructions

UFR II Printer Guide CD-ROM

• Bar Code Printing Instructions

Bar Code Printing Guide CD-ROM

• PCL Printer Driver Installation and Instructions

PCL Driver Guide CD-ROM

• UFRII LT Printer Driver Installation and

Instructions UFR II Driver Guide CD-ROM

• Fax Driver Installation and Instructions

Fax Driver Guide CD-ROM

To view the manual in PDF format, Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat Reader is required. If Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat Reader is not installed on your
system, please download it from the Adobe Systems Incorporated website.
 How This Manual Is Organized

Chapter 1 Before You Start Using This Machine

Chapter 2 Basic Operations

Chapter 3 Optional Equipment

Chapter 4 Customizing Settings

Chapter 5 Checking Job and Device Status

Chapter 6 System Manager Settings

Chapter 7 Routine Maintenance

Chapter 8 Troubleshooting

Chapter 9 Appendix

Includes the report samples, the specifications of the main unit and optional equipment, the
Relationship between Original Orientation and Preprinted Paper Output Chart, and index.

Considerable effort has been made to ensure that this manual is free of inaccuracies and omissions. However, as we are constantly improving our
products, if you need an exact specification, please contact Canon.
Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ix
How to Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ix
Symbols Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Keys Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
Displays Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Illustrations Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Available Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Operations and Terms Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xiv
Legal Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xvi
Laser Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi
Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
International Energy Star-Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
EMC Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
WEEE Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
IPv6 Ready Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Disclaimers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your Product and the Use of Images . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
Important Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv
Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Maintenance and Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviii
Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxx
Other Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxx

Chapter 1 Before You Start Using This Machine

Installation Location and Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Installation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Avoid Installing the Machine in the Following Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Select a Safe Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Provide Adequate Installation Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Moving the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Handling Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
External View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Internal View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Control Panel Parts and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Main Power and Control Panel Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
How to Turn ON the Main Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Control Panel Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Obtaining and Registering a License Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Obtaining a License Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Registering a License Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25

iv
Chapter 2 Basic Operations

What This Machine Can Do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Overview of the iR2030/iR2025/iR2022i/iR2018i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Switching the Functions Indicated on the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
User Management and Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Specifying Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Functions That Conserve Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Checking and Canceling Print Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Other Useful Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Using the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Frequently Used Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Touch Panel Key Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Adjusting the Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Entering Characters from the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Alphanumeric Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Values in Inches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Entering the Department ID and Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Using the User ID Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Placing Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Document Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Platen Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Feeder (DADF-P2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Multi-functional Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Available Paper Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56

Chapter 3 Optional Equipment

System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Sample System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Available Combination of Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Cassette Feeding Module-P1/Q1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Optional Accessory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Feeder (DADF-P2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Platen Cover Type J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Finisher-U2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Finishing Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Inner 2 Way Tray-E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Card Reader-E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Procedure before Using the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Procedure after Using the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

v
 Department ID Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Changing the Password and Page Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Checking the Page Counts on a Control Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Checking and Printing Counter Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Clearing Page Totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Accepting Print and Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40

Chapter 4 Customizing Settings

What Are Additional Functions? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Accessing the Additional Functions Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Additional Functions Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Specifying Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Initial Function at Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Default Display after Auto Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Tone Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Setting the Toner Save Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Printer Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Inch Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Output Tray Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Standard Paper for the Stack Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Paper Feed Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Changing the Language Shown on the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Reversing the Contrast of the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Displaying a Feeder Error Message Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Data Compression Ratio for Remote Scans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Setting the Gamma Value for Remote Scans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Returning the Common Settings to Their Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
Timer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Current Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Auto Sleep Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Auto Clear Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
Cleaning and Adjusting the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
Improving Print Quality and Density (Special Mode M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
Preventing Paper Curls or Jams Due to High-humidity Environment
(Special Mode N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Preventing Paper Jams when Printing on the Back of a Printed Paper
(Special Mode O) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Preventing Paper Curls Due to Paper Type (Special Mode P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
Setting the Bond Special Fixing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Cutting Down Waiting Time for a Next Job (Special Mode S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
Adjusting Output Speed in the Rotate Collate Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
Feeder Smudge Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84

Chapter 5 Checking Job and Device Status

Checking the Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Checking Job Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Copy/Print Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Canceling Copy/Print Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

vi
Chapter 6 System Manager Settings

Specifying the System Manager Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Department ID Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Registering the Department ID, Password, and Page Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Changing the Password and Page Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Erasing the Department ID and Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Checking and Printing Counter Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Clearing Page Totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Accepting Print and Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Device Information Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Managing User IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Remote UI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Restricting the Send Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Setting a Password for the Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Restricting the New Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Restricting PC Faxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
Restricting Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Confirming Entered Fax Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Restricting Broadcasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Checking the Job Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Restricting the USB Interface Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Displaying Department ID/User Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Printing/Storing Received Documents When Document Forwarding Fails . . . . . . . . 6-56
Auto Online/Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Auto Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Auto Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
Detecting and Installing Drivers that Support Functions Specified on
the Machine into Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63

Chapter 7 Routine Maintenance

Paper Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Loading Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Adjusting a Paper Drawer to Hold a Different Paper Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Feeder (DADF-P2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Replacing the Stamp Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Finisher-U2 (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Replacing the Staple Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Replacing the Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Drum Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Replacing the Drum Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Affixing the Counter Label for Service Technician . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Routine Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Platen Glass and Underside of the Feeder/Platen Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Manual Feeder Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Offset Roller Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Transfer Roller Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
Drum Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Fixing Unit Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Automatic Feeder Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54

vii
 Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56

Chapter 8 Troubleshooting

Reducing the Frequency of Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Clearing Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Screen Indicating the Locations of Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Fixing Unit (Inside the Main Unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Duplex Unit (Duplex Unit-B1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Feeder (DADF-P2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Stack Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Paper Drawer 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Paper Drawers 2, 3, and 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Finisher-U2 (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Inner 2 Way Tray-E2 (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Clearing Staple Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
List of Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
Self-Diagnostic Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
List of Error Codes without Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
If Memory Becomes Full during Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
Service Call Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51
Contacting Your Local Authorized Canon Dealer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51

Chapter 9 Appendix

Report Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Users Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Department ID List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Main Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Feeder (DADF-P2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Cassette Feeding Module-P1 (Optional for the iR2018i) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Cassette Feeding Module-Q1 (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Finisher-U2 (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Duplex Unit (Duplex Unit-B1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Inner 2 Way Tray-E2 (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Card Reader-E1 (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Relationship between Original Orientation and Preprinted Paper Output Chart . . . . 9-9
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

viii
 Preface
Thank you for purchasing the Canon iR2030/iR2025/iR2022i/iR2018i. Please read this manual
thoroughly before operating the machine to familiarize yourself with its capabilities, and to make the
most of its many functions. After reading this manual, store it in a safe place for future reference.

How to Use This Manual

Symbols Used in This Manual

The following symbols are used in this manual to explain procedures, restrictions, handling
precautions, and instructions that should be observed for safety.
.

WARNING Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to
persons if not performed correctly. In order to use the machine safely, always
pay attention to these warnings.
.

CAUTION Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons, or
damage to property if not performed correctly. In order to use the machine
safely, always pay attention to these cautions.
.

IMPORTANT Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these

items carefully in order to operate the machine correctly, and to avoid damage
to the machine.
.

NOTE Indicates a clarification of an operation, or contains additional explanations for

a procedure. Reading these notes is highly recommended.

ix
 Keys Used in This Manual
The following symbols and key names are a few examples of how keys to be pressed are
expressed in this manual:

• Touch Panel Display Keys: [Key Name]

Examples: [Cancel]
[Done]
• Control Panel Keys: <Key icon> + (Key Name)
Examples: (Start)
(Stop)

x
Displays Used in This Manual
Screen shots of the touch panel display used in this manual are those taken when the following
optional equipment is attached to the iR2022i: the Finisher-U2, Additional Finisher Tray-C1,
Cassette Feeding Module-Q1, Duplex Unit-B1, and Super G3 FAX Board.
Note that functions that cannot be used depending on the model or options, are not displayed
on the touch panel display.
The keys which you should press are marked with a , as shown below.
When multiple keys can be pressed on the touch panel display, all keys are marked. Select the
keys which suit your needs.

Place your originals ➞ press [Special Features].

Press this key for operation.

xi
 Illustrations Used in This Manual
Illustrations used in this manual are those displayed when the iR2022i has the following optional
equipment attached to it: the Finisher-U2, Additional Finisher Tray-C1, and Cassette Feeding
Module-Q1.

xii
Available Features
The procedures described in this manual are based on the iR2022i. Depending on the system
configuration and product purchased, some features described in the manuals may not be
functional. The table below shows the available features on a product basis.
: Available
: Unavailable
opt.: optional
I-FAX/ Original Feeder/
PRINT PRINT Network Remote 2-Sided
COPY FAX E-MAIL/ Size Platen
(UFRII LT) (PCL) Scan UI Printing
FTP/SMB Detection Cover

iR2018i opt. opt. *1

iR2022i opt. opt. *1

iR2025 opt. opt. opt. opt.*2

iR2030 opt. opt. opt. opt.*2

*1: Only the feeder is available.

*2: The platen cover or the feeder can be selected at the time of purchase.

NOTE
For more information on the optional equipment, see Chapter 3, “Optional Equipment”.

xiii
Operations and Terms Used in This Manual
This machine makes effective use of the memory to perform print operations efficiently. For
example, as soon as the machine has scanned the original that you want to copy, it can
immediately scan the next person’s original. You can also print from this machine, using a
function other than the Copy function. In this machine, these operations take place in a complex
way, so that not only copies, but also various kinds of prints may sometimes have to wait their
turn before they can be printed.
To avoid confusion when reading this manual, the terms “scanning,” “printing,” and “copying,”
used throughout this manual are defined below. When making a copy, the process of scanning
originals and printing copies may be described as separate functions.

Scanning

Scanning an original for copying or

sending.

xiv
Printing

Outputting documents such as a copy,

fax, or outputting data sent from
a personal computer to the machine.

Copying

Printing data scanned from an

original, followed by finishing
options, such as stapling.

xv
Legal Notices

Laser Safety
This product is certified as a Class I laser product under IEC60825-1:1993+A1:1997+A2:2001,
EN60825-1:1994+A1:2002+A2:2001. This means that the product does not produce hazardous
laser radiation.
Since radiation emitted inside the product is completely confined within protective housings and
external covers, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user
operation. Do not remove protective housings or external covers, except as directed by the
equipment’s Reference Guide.

xvi
Additional Information
When servicing or adjusting the optional system of the product, be careful not to place
screwdrivers or other shiny objects in the path of the laser beam. Also, accessories such as
watches and rings should be removed before working on this product. The reflected beam, even
though visible or invisible, can permanently damage your eyes.
The labels shown below are attached to the laser scanner unit inside the machine and next to
the toner cartridge, behind the front cover.

xvii
 This product has been classified under IEC60825-1: 1993+A1:1997+A2:2001,
EN60825-1:1994+A1:2002+A2:2001, which conform to the following classes;
CLASS I LASER PRUDUCT
LASER KLASSE I
APPAREIL A RAYONNEMENT LASER DE CLASSE I
APPARECCHIO LASER DI CLASSE I
PRODUCT LASER DE CLASE I
APARELHO A LASER DE CLASSE I

CAUTION
Use of controls, adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in this
manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

xviii
International Energy Star-Program
As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Canon Inc. has determined that this product meets
the ENERGY STAR Program for energy efficiency.

The International ENERGY STAR Office Equipment Program is an international

program that promotes energy saving through the use of computers and other
office equipment.

The program backs the development and dissemination of products with functions
that effectively reduce energy consumption. It is an open system in which business
proprietors can participate voluntarily.

The targeted products are office equipment, such as computers, displays, printers,
facsimiles, and copiers. The standards and logos are uniform among participating
nations.

EMC Directive
This equipment conforms with the essential requirements of EC Directive 89/336/ECC.
We declare that this product conforms with the EMC requirements of EC Directive 89/336/EEC
at nominal remains input 230 V, 50Hz although the rated input of the product is 220-240 V, 50/
60Hz.
Use of shielded cable is necessary to comply with the technical requirements of EMC Directive.

xix
 WEEE Directive
European Union (and EEA) only.

This symbol indicates that this product is not to be disposed of with your
household waste, according to the WEEE Directive (2002/96/EC) and your
national law. This product should be handed over to a designated collection point,
e.g., on an authorized one-for-one basis when you buy a new similar product or to
an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic
equipment (EEE). Improper handling of this type of waste could have a possible
negative impact on the environment and human health due to potentially
hazardous substances that are generally associated with EEE. At the same time,
your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to the
effective usage of natural resources. For more information about where you can
drop off your waste equipment for recycling, please contact your local city office,
waste authority, approved WEEE scheme or your household waste disposal
service. For more information regarding return and recycling of WEEE products,
please visit www.canon-europe.com/environment.

(EEA: Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein)

IPv6 Ready Logo

This machine has acquired IPv6 Ready Logo Phase-1, as established by the IPv6
Forum.

Trademarks
Canon, the Canon logo, iR, and NetSpot are trademarks of Canon Inc.
Adobe and Adobe Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation.
Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
U.S. and/or other countries.
Other product and company names herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners.

Copyright
Copyright 2007 by Canon Inc. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means,
electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, or by any information storage
or retrieval system without the prior written permission of Canon Inc.

xx
Disclaimers
The information in this document is subject to change without notice.
CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL,
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT
LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY, MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. CANON INC.
SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS
MATERIAL.

Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your Product and the

Use of Images
Using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce certain documents, and the use of
such images as scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced by your product, may be prohibited
by law and may result in criminal and/or civil liability. A non-exhaustive list of these documents is
set forth below. This list is intended to be a guide only. If you are uncertain about the legality of
using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce any particular document, and/or of the
use of the images scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced, you should consult in advance
with your legal advisor for guidance.

• Paper Money • Travelers Checks

• Money Orders • Food Stamps
• Certificates of Deposit • Passports
• Postage Stamps • Immigration Papers
(canceled or uncanceled)
• Identifying Badges or Insignias • Internal Revenue Stamps
(canceled or uncanceled)
• Selective Service or Draft Papers • Bonds or Other Certificates of
Indebtedness
• Checks or Drafts Issued by Governmental • Stock Certificates
Agencies
• Motor Vehicle Licenses and Certificates of • Copyrighted Works/Works of Art without
Title Permission of Copyright Owner

xxi
 Important Safety Instructions
Please read these “Important Safety Instructions” thoroughly before operating the machine. As
these instructions are intended to prevent injury to the user or other persons or destruction of
property, always pay attention to these instructions. Also, since it may result in unexpected
accidents or injuries, do not perform any operation unless otherwise specified in the manual.
Improper operation or use of this machine could result in personal injury and/or damage
requiring extensive repair that may not be covered under your Limited Warranty.

Installation
WARNING
• Do not install the machine near alcohol, paint thinner, or other flammable substances. If
flammable substances come into contact with electrical parts inside the machine, it may result in
a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not place the following items on the machine. If these items come into contact with a
high-voltage area inside the machine, it may result in a fire or electrical shock.
If these items are dropped or spilled inside the machine, immediately turn OFF the main power
switch, and disconnect the power cord from the power outlet. Then, contact your local authorized
Canon dealer.
- Necklaces and other metal objects
- Cups, vases, flowerpots, and other containers filled with water or liquids

xxii
CAUTION
• Do not install the machine in unstable locations, such as on unsteady platforms or inclined floors,
or in locations subject to excessive vibrations, as this may cause the machine to fall or tip over,
resulting in personal injury.
• Never block the ventilation slots and louvers on the machine. These openings are provided for
proper ventilation of working parts inside the machine. Blocking these openings can cause the
machine to overheat. Never place the machine on a soft surface, such as a sofa or rug.
• Do not install the machine in the following locations:
- A damp or dusty location
- A location near water faucets or water
- A location exposed to direct sunlight
- A location subject to high temperatures
- A location near open flames

xxiii
 Power Supply
WARNING
• Do not damage or modify the power cord. Also, do not place heavy objects on the power cord, or
pull on or excessively bend it, as this could cause electrical damage and result in a fire or
electrical shock.
• Keep the power cord away from a heat source; failure to do this may cause the power cord
coating to melt, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not connect or disconnect the power cord with wet hands, as this may result in electrical
shock.
• Do not connect the power cord to a multiplug power strip, as this may cause a fire or electrical
shock.
• Do not bundle up or tie the power cord in a knot, as this may result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Insert the power plug completely into the power outlet, as failure to do so may result in a fire or
electrical shock.
• Do not use power cords other than the power cord provided, as this may result in a fire or
electrical shock.
• As a general rule, do not use extension cords. Using an extension cord may result in a fire or
electrical shock. If an extension cord must be used, however, use one rated for voltages of
220-240 V AC and over, untie the cord binding, and insert the power plug completely into the
extension cord outlet to ensure a firm connection between the power cord and the extension
cord.

CAUTION
• Do not use power supplies with voltages other than those specified herein, as this may result in a
fire or electrical shock.
• Always grasp the power plug when disconnecting the power cord. Pulling on the power cord may
expose or snap the core wire, or otherwise damage the power cord. If the power cord is damaged,
this could cause current to leak, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.
• Leave sufficient space around the power plug so that it can be unplugged easily. If objects are
placed around the power plug, you will be unable to unplug it in an emergency.

xxiv
Handling
WARNING
• Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the machine. There are high-temperature and
high-voltage components inside the machine which may result in a fire or electrical shock.
• If the machine makes strange noises, or gives off smoke, heat, or strange smells, immediately
turn OFF the main power switch, and disconnect the power cord from the power outlet. Then,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer. Continued use of the machine in this condition may
result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not use highly flammable sprays near the machine. If gas from these sprays comes into
contact with the electrical components inside the machine, this may result in a fire or electrical
shock.
• To avoid damage to the power cord and creating a fire hazard, always turn OFF the main power
switch, and unplug the interface cable when moving the machine. Otherwise, the power cord or
interface cable may be damaged, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not drop paper clips, staples, or other metal objects inside the machine. Also, do not spill
water, liquids, or flammable substances (alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, etc.) inside the machine.
If these items come into contact with a high-voltage area inside the machine, it may result in a fire
or electrical shock. If these items are dropped or spilled inside the machine, immediately turn
OFF the main power switch, and disconnect the power cord from the power outlet. Then contact
your local authorized Canon dealer.

xxv
 CAUTION
• Do not place heavy objects on the machine, as they may tip over or fall resulting in personal
injury.
• Close the feeder/platen cover gently to avoid catching your hands, as this may result in personal
injury.

• Do not press down hard on the feeder/platen cover when using the platen glass to make copies of
thick books. Doing so may damage the platen glass and result in personal injury.
• Do not touch the finisher while the machine is printing, as this may result in personal injury.
• Do not place your hands, hair, clothing, etc., near the exit and feed rollers. Even if the machine is
not in operation, your hands, hair, or clothing may get caught in the rollers, which may result in
personal injury or damage if the machine suddenly starts printing.
• Be careful when removing printed paper from output trays or when aligning it, because it may be
hot and result in burn injury.
• Do not place your hand in the part of the tray where stapling is performed when a finisher is
attached, as this may result in personal injury.

Finisher U2

xxvi
• The laser beam can be harmful to human bodies. Since radiation emitted inside the product is
completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot
escape from the machine during any phase of user operation. Read the following remarks and
instructions for safety.
• If the laser beam escapes from the machine, exposure may cause serious damage to your eyes.
• Never open covers other than those instructed in this manual.
• Do not remove the caution labels attached to the laser scanner unit inside the machine and next
to the toner cartridge, behind the front cover.

• Turn OFF the control panel power switch for safety when the machine will not be used for a long
period of time, such as overnight. Also, turn OFF the main power switch, and disconnect the
power cord for safety when the machine will not be used for an extended period of time, such as
during consecutive holidays.

xxvii
 Maintenance and Inspections
WARNING
• When cleaning the machine, first turn OFF the main power switch, and then disconnect the power
cord. Failure to observe these steps may result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet regularly, and clean the area around the base of
the power plug’s metal pins and the power outlet with a dry cloth to ensure that all dust and grime
is removed. If the power cord is connected for a long period of time in a damp, dusty, or smoky
location, dust can build up around the power plug and become damp. This may cause a short
circuit and result in a fire.
• Clean the machine using a slightly dampened cloth with a mild detergent mixed with water. Do not
use alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, or other flammable substances. Check detergent for
flammability prior to use. If flammable substances come into contact with a high-voltage area
inside the machine, it may result in a fire or electrical shock.
• There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high voltages. When removing
jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow necklaces, bracelets, or
other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this may result in burns or electrical
shock.
• Do not burn or throw used toner cartridges into open flames, as this may cause the toner
remaining inside the toner cartridges to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire.

xxviii
CAUTION
• The fixing unit, the duplex unit, and their surroundings inside the machine may become hot
during use. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not
touch the fixing unit, the duplex unit, and their surroundings, as doing so may result in burns.

• When removing jammed paper or replacing the toner cartridge, take care not to allow the toner to
come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they
become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing them with warm water will set the
toner, and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove the jammed paper
gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and getting into your eyes or mouth. If
the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and immediately
consult a physician.
• When loading paper or removing jammed originals or paper, take care not to cut your hands on
the edges of the originals or paper.
• When removing a used toner cartridge, remove the toner cartridge carefully to prevent the toner
from scattering and getting into your eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth,
wash them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
• Do not dismantle the toner cartridge, as doing so may cause toner to fly out and enter your eyes
or mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and
immediately consult physician.
• Handle the toner cartridge carefully. Avoid contact with any toner that is released from the
cartridge. If toner makes contact with your skin, immediately wash the area with soap and cold
water. If your skin still feels irritated after washing the area thoroughly, or you ingest toner, seek
immediate medical treatment.

xxix
 Consumables
WARNING
• Do not burn or throw used toner cartridges into open flames, as this may cause the toner
remaining inside the toner cartridges to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire.
• Do not store toner cartridges or copy paper in places exposed to open flames, as this may cause
the toner or paper to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire.
• When discarding used toner cartridges, put the toner cartridges into a bag to prevent the toner
remaining inside the toner cartridges from scattering, and dispose of them in a location away
from open flames.

CAUTION
• Keep toner cartridges and other consumables out of the reach of small children. If these items are
ingested, consult a physician immediately.
• Do not dismantle the toner cartridge, as dismantling it may cause toner dust to scatter on your
skin or clothes. Immediately brush the toner off your clothes (but do not wash the clothing with
hot water, which may cause the toner to set in the fabric). If toner gets into your eyes or mouth,
wash them immediately with cold water and seek immediate medical treatment.
• Handle the toner cartridge carefully. Avoid contact with any toner that is released from the
cartridge. If toner makes contact with your skin, immediately wash the area with soap and cold
water. If your skin still feels irritated after washing the area thoroughly, or you ingest toner, seek
immediate medical treatment.

Other Warnings
WARNING
For cardiac pacemaker users:
This product generates a low-level magnetic field. If you use a cardiac pacemaker and feel
abnormalities, please move away from the product and consult your doctor.

xxx
Before You Start Using This
Machine
This chapter describes what you should know before using this machine, such as parts and their functions,
1
CHAPTER

and how to turn ON the main power.

Installation Location and Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Installation Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Handling Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
External View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Internal View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Control Panel Parts and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Main Power and Control Panel Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
How to Turn ON the Main Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Control Panel Power Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Obtaining and Registering a License Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Obtaining a License Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Registering a License Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25

1-1
 Installation Location and Handling

1 This section describes precautions for installation location and handling. We recommend that
you read this section prior to using this machine.
Before You Start Using This Machine

Installation Precautions

Avoid Installing the Machine in the Following Locations

■ Avoid locations subject to temperature and humidity extremes, whether low

or high.
For example, avoid installing the machine near water faucets, hot water heaters, humidifiers, air
conditioners, heaters, or stoves.

1-2 Installation Location and Handling

■ Avoid installing the machine in direct sunlight.
If this is unavoidable, use curtains to shade the machine. Be sure that the curtains do not block the
machine’s ventilation slots or louvers, or interfere with the electrical cord or power supply.

Before You Start Using This Machine

■ Avoid poorly ventilated locations.
This machine generates a slight amount of ozone during normal use. Although sensitivity to ozone may
vary, this amount is not harmful. Ozone may be more noticeable during extended use or long production
runs, especially in poorly ventilated rooms. It is recommended that the room be appropriately ventilated,
sufficient to maintain a comfortable working environment, in areas of machine operation.

Installation Location and Handling 1-3

 ■ Avoid locations where a considerable amount of dust accumulates.

■ Avoid locations where ammonia gas is emitted.

1
Before You Start Using This Machine

■ Avoid locations near volatile or flammable materials, such as alcohol or paint

thinner.

■ Avoid locations that are subject to vibration.

For example, avoid installing the machine on unstable floors or stands.

1-4 Installation Location and Handling

■ Avoid exposing the machine to rapid changes in temperature.
If the room in which the machine is installed is cold but rapidly heated, water droplets (condensation)
may form inside the machine. This may result in a noticeable degradation in the quality of the copied
image, the inability to properly scan an original, or the copies having no printed image at all.

Before You Start Using This Machine

■ Avoid installing the machine near computers or other precision electronic
equipment.
Electrical interference and vibrations generated by the machine during printing can adversely affect the
operation of such equipment.

■ Avoid installing the machine near televisions, radios, or similar electronic

equipment.
The machine might interfere with sound and picture signal reception. Insert the power plug into a
dedicated power outlet, and maintain as much space as possible between the machine and other
electronic equipment.

Installation Location and Handling 1-5

 Select a Safe Power Supply

■ Plug the machine into a standard 230 V AC, three-wire grounded outlet.

■ Make sure that the power supply for the machine is safe, and has a steady
voltage.
1 ■ Do not connect other electrical equipment to the same power outlet to which
the machine is connected.
Before You Start Using This Machine

■ Do not connect the power cord into a multi-plug power strip, as this may
cause a fire or electrical shock.

■ The power cord may become damaged if it is often stepped on or if heavy

objects are placed on it. Continued use of a damaged power cord can lead to
an accident, such as a fire or electrical shock.

1-6 Installation Location and Handling

Provide Adequate Installation Space

■ Provide enough space on each side of the machine for unrestricted

operation.
The optional Finisher-U2 and
No optional equipment is attached. Additional Finisher Tray-C1 are attached.
100 mm or more 100 mm or more 1

Before You Start Using This Machine

1,249 mm 1,249 mm

1,016 mm 1,198 mm*

* The width is 1,016 mm when no options are attached,
or 1,247 mm when the optional Document Tray-J1
is attached.

NOTE
Be sure to provide enough space also at the top of the machine in order to open the feeder/platen
cover.

Installation Location and Handling 1-7

 Moving the Machine

■ If you intend to move the machine, even to a location on the same floor of
your building, contact your local authorized Canon dealer beforehand.

1
Before You Start Using This Machine

■ The machine is heavy, and requires two or more people to lift it.
Therefore, do not attempt to move it by yourself. Doing so may result in
personal injury.

1-8 Installation Location and Handling

■ When carrying the machine, be sure to hold the handles, as indicated below.
Failure to do so may cause the machine to be dropped, and result in personal
injury.

Before You Start Using This Machine

Pull out and
hold these
handles.
Hold these
recessed. handles.

Installation Location and Handling 1-9

 Handling Precautions
■ Some parts inside the machine are subject to high voltage and temperatures.
Take adequate precautions when inspecting the inside of the machine. Do
not carry out any inspections not described in this manual.

1 ■ Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the machine.

Before You Start Using This Machine

■ Be careful not to spill liquids or drop any foreign objects, such as paper clips
or staples inside the machine. If a foreign object comes into contact with
electrical parts inside the machine, it may cause a short circuit and result in a
fire or electrical shock.

1-10 Installation Location and Handling

■ If there is smoke or unusual noise, immediately turn the main power switch
OFF, disconnect the power cord from the power outlet, and then call your
local authorized Canon dealer. Using the machine in this state may cause a
fire or electrical shock. Also, avoid placing objects around the power plug so
that the machine can be disconnected whenever necessary.

Before You Start Using This Machine

■ Do not turn the main power switch OFF or open the front covers while the
machine is in operation. This may result in paper jams.

■ Do not use flammable sprays, such as spray glue near the machine. There is
danger of ignition.

Installation Location and Handling 1-11

 ■ This machine generates a slight amount of ozone during normal use.
Although sensitivity to ozone may vary, this amount is not harmful. Ozone
may be more noticeable during extended use or long production runs,
especially in poorly ventilated rooms. It is recommended that the room be
appropriately ventilated, sufficient to maintain a comfortable working
environment, in areas of machine operation.

1 ■ For safety reasons, turn OFF the control panel power switch of the machine
when it will not be used for a long period of time, such as overnight. As an
Before You Start Using This Machine

added safety measure, turn OFF the main power switch, and disconnect the
power cord when the machine will not be used for an extended period of time,
such as during consecutive holidays.

■ Do not use a telephone cable longer than 3 m.

1-12 Installation Location and Handling

Parts and Their Functions

This section provides you with the names and functions of all parts on the outside and inside of 1
the main unit and control panel. An illustration of the machine with some optional equipment

Before You Start Using This Machine

attached to it is also provided. For more information on the optional equipment, parts and their
functions, see Chapter 3, “Optional Equipment.”

External View
The iR2022i with the optional Finisher-U2,
The iR2022i with the optional Inner 2 Way Tray-E2
Additional Finisher Tray-C1
and Cassette Feeding Module-Q1 attached
and Cassette Feeding Module-Q1 attached

a Stack Bypass d Main Power Switch

Use the stack bypass to feed paper manually and for Press to the “I” side to turn the power ON. (See “Main
loading nonstandard paper stock, such as envelopes. (See Power and Control Panel Power,” on p. 1-16.)
“Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass,” on p. 2-41.)
e Paper Drawer 1
b Main Control Panel Holds up to 250 sheets of paper (80 g/m2).
Includes the keys, touch panel display, and indicators
f Paper Drawer 2 (Optional equipment for the
required for operating the machine. (See “Control Panel
Parts and Functions,” on p. 1-15.) iR2018i)
Holds up to 250 sheets of paper (80 g/m2).
c Feeder (DADF-P2)
Originals placed in the feeder are automatically fed sheet
by sheet to the scanning area of the platen glass. The
feeder also automatically turns over two-sided originals to
make two or one sided copies. For more information on the
feeder, see “Feeder (DADF-P2),” on p. 3-10.)

Parts and Their Functions 1-13

 Internal View
The iR2022i with the optional Duplex Unit-B1 and
Cassette Feeding Module-Q1 attached

1
Before You Start Using This Machine

a Platen Glass f Fixing Unit

Place originals here when scanning books, thick originals, If a paper jam occurs in the fixing unit, remove the jammed
thin originals, transparencies, etc. paper carefully. (See “Fixing Unit (Inside the Main Unit),” on
p. 8-9.)
b Toner Cartridge
When toner runs out, pull out the toner cartridge, and g Duplex Unit (Duplex Unit-B1)
replace it with a new one. The duplex unit enables you to use the 2-Sided mode for
copying or printing. (The Duplex Unit-B1 is optional for the
c Front Cover
iR2022i/iR2018i. For more information on the optional
Open this cover to replace the toner cartridge or drum unit. equipment, see Chapter 3, “Optional Equipment.”)
(See “Replacing the Toner Cartridge,” on p. 7-22, or
“Replacing the Drum Unit,” on p. 7-28.) h Left Cover
Open this cover when clearing paper jams inside the main
d Drum Unit
unit.
When the drum unit is full of waste toner, replace it with a
new one. i Scanning Area
Originals placed in the feeder are scanned here.
e Paper Drawer’s Left Covers
Open these covers when clearing a paper jam in Paper
Drawers 2, 3 and 4.

1-14 Parts and Their Functions

 Control Panel Parts and Functions
a b c d e f

g
1

Before You Start Using This Machine

h
i

q p on m lk j

a COPY key j Main Power Indicator

Press to use the Copy function. The Copy Basic Features Lights when the main power is turned ON.
screen appears on the touch panel display.
k Clear key
b SEND key Press to clear entered values or characters.
Press to use the Send/Fax function. The Send Basic
l Error Indicator
Features screen appears on the touch panel display.
Flashes or lights if there is an error in the machine. When
c SCAN key the Error indicator flashes, follow the instructions that
Press to enable the Network Scan function. (See the Color appear on the touch panel display. When the Error indicator
Network ScanGear User’s Guide.) maintains a steady red light, contact your local authorized
Canon dealer.
d Reset key
Press to restore the standard settings of the machine. m Log In/Out key
Press when setting or enabling Department ID
e Numeric keys
Management.
Press to enter numerical values.
n Processing/Data Indicator
f Control Panel Power Switch (Sub Power Supply)
Flashes or blinks green when the machine is performing
Press to turn the control panel ON or OFF. When turned operations. When the Processing/Data indicator maintains
OFF, the machine is in the Sleep mode. a steady green light, fax data is stored in memory.
g Counter Check key o Display Contrast Dial
Press to display the copy and print count totals and the Use to adjust the brightness of the touch panel display.
machine’s serial number on the touch panel display.
p Additional Functions key
h Stop key
Press to specify additional functions.
Press to stop a job in progress, such as a scan, copy, or fax
job (scanning only). q Touch Panel Display
The settings screen for each function is shown on this
i Start key
display.
Press to start an operation.

NOTE
The SEND key is available only if the optional Color Send Kit (standard for the iR2022i/iR2018i) is
activated and/or the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed.

Parts and Their Functions 1-15

 Main Power and Control Panel Power

1 The machine is provided with two power switches, a main power switch and a control panel
power switch.
Before You Start Using This Machine

How to Turn ON the Main Power

This section explains how to turn ON the main power.

1 Make sure that the power plug is firmly inserted into the power outlet.

WARNING
Do not connect or disconnect the power cord with wet hands, as this may result in
electrical shock.

2 Press the main power switch to “I” side. The main power switch is
located on the right side of the machine.
If you want to turn the main power OFF, first turn the control panel power switch OFF, and then
press the main power switch to the “ ” side.

The main power indicator on the control panel lights when the main power switch is turned ON.

IMPORTANT
If the main power indicator does not light up, make sure that the power cord is firmly inserted into
the power outlet.

1-16 Main Power and Control Panel Power

3 The screen shown below is displayed while the system software is
loading.
❑ The Start Up screen is displayed until the machine is ready to scan.

Before You Start Using This Machine

If a message is displayed on the touch panel display, proceed to step 4.
❑ The screen below is displayed when the machine is ready to scan.

Main Power and Control Panel Power 1-17

 IMPORTANT
• If you turn OFF the main power, wait at least 10 seconds before turning the main power back ON.
• Do not turn the main power OFF if the optional Color Send Kit (standard for the iR2022i/iR2018i)
is activated, or the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, and you want to be able to send or
receive I-fax/fax documents. Sending or receiving I-fax/fax documents cannot be done when the
power is turned OFF.
• If User ID Management is set to ‘On’, the machine will take longer to become ready to scan.
1
NOTE
Before You Start Using This Machine

• Once the message <Ready to copy.> appears on the touch panel display, you can specify
settings. Copying or printing begins automatically, as soon as the machine finishes warming up.
(See Chapter 1, “Introduction to Copying,” in the Copying Guide.)
• In the case above, the default settings are selected.
• The default copy settings are:
- Copy Ratio: 1:1 (100%)
- Paper Selection: Auto Paper Selection
- Copy Exposure: Automatic Exposure Adjustment
- Copy Quantity: 1
- Original Type: Text
- Copy Function: 1 1-sided copy

• The default settings for each function (Copy or Send/Fax) of the machine are already set at the
factory, but you can change them to suit your needs. (See Chapter 4, “Customizing Settings,” in
the Copying Guide and Chapter 8, “Customizing Communications Settings,” in the Sending and
Facsimile Guide.)
• You can select which functions to display on the Basic Features screen when turning the main
power ON, according to the Additional Functions settings. (See “Initial Function at Power ON,” on
p. 4-15.)

1-18 Main Power and Control Panel Power

4 Press the appropriate keys in accordance with the messages
displayed on the touch panel display.
If there are no messages displayed, this step is unnecessary.

● If the message <You must insert a control card.> appears:

❑ Insert a control card into the optional Card Reader-E1.
1

Before You Start Using This Machine

The Basic Features screen is displayed.

NOTE
• If the optional Card Reader-E1 is not attached, this message will not appear.
• For instructions on using the optional Card Reader-E1, see “Card Reader-E1,” on p. 3-19.

Main Power and Control Panel Power 1-19

 ● If the message <Enter the Department ID and Password using the numeric
keys.> appears:
❑ Press [Department ID] ➞ enter the Department ID using - (numeric keys).
❑ Press [Password] ➞ enter the password using - (numeric keys).
❑ Press (Log In/Out).

1
Before You Start Using This Machine

The Basic Features screen is displayed.

NOTE
• If the Department ID Management and password have not been set, this message will not
appear.
• For instructions on entering the Department ID and password, see “Entering the Department ID
and Password,” on p. 2-25.

1-20 Main Power and Control Panel Power

● If the message <Enter the User ID and Password.> appears:
❑ Press [User ID] ➞ enter the User ID ➞ press [OK].
❑ Press [Password] ➞ enter the password ➞ press [OK].
❑ Press (Log In/Out).

Before You Start Using This Machine

The Basic Features screen is displayed.

IMPORTANT
The machine will enter sleep mode if the main power switch is pressed when the machine’s
power is ON and the optional Cassette Heater Unit-34 is connected.
For details about the optional Cassette Heater Unit-34, contact your local authorized Canon
dealer.

NOTE
For instructions on entering the User ID and password on the User ID Management screen, see
“Using the User ID Management,” p. 2-29.

Main Power and Control Panel Power 1-21

 Control Panel Power Switch
To turn the control panel ON or OFF, press the control panel power switch. When turned OFF,
the machine is in the Sleep mode.

Control Panel Power Switch Machine Status

1 ON
Standby mode (ready for immediate
copying or printing)
Before You Start Using This Machine

OFF Sleep mode

NOTE
• The machine can receive and print documents from a personal computer when it is in the Sleep mode.
I-fax/fax documents can also be received while the machine is in the Sleep mode.
• The energy consumption while the machine is in the Sleep mode can be set from the Additional
Functions screen. (See “Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode,” on p. 4-33.)
• The machine will not enter the Sleep mode if it is scanning or printing. (See “Auto Sleep Time,” on
p. 4-65.)
• It takes approximately 10 seconds for the machine to recover after the Sleep mode is deactivated.
• If Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode is set to ‘Low’, it may take more than 10 seconds for the touch
panel display to be displayed after pressing the control panel power switch.

1-22 Main Power and Control Panel Power

System Settings

It is necessary to set up the machine before using it on a network, as a printer, or with the Send 1
or Fax function.

Before You Start Using This Machine

To set up the machine, refer to the following guides or sections for instructions:

■ Connecting the Machine to the Network

See the Network Quick Start Guide.

■ Setting Up the Network

See the Network Guide.

■ Setting Up the Printer

See the PCL/UFR II Printer Guide or UFR II Driver Guide.

■ Installing the Printer Driver

See the PCL Driver Guide or UFR II Driver Guide.

■ Using the Send Function

See the Sending and Facsimile Guide.

■ Using the Fax Function

See the Sending and Facsimile Guide.

■ Date and Time Settings

See “Current Date and Time,” on p. 4-59.

■ System Manager Settings

See Chapter 6, “System Manager Settings”

System Settings 1-23

 Obtaining and Registering a License Key

1 To activate certain functions in your machine, it is necessary to register a license key in License
Registration in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
Before You Start Using This Machine

Obtaining a License Key

A license key can be obtained by using a web browser to access the license management
system. Access the system by entering the following URL:
http://www.canon.com/lms/license/

■ Administration Numbers That Are Necessary to Obtain a License Key

Follow the procedure displayed on the screen. The following administration numbers are necessary to
obtain the license key:
• License Access Number
Check the License Access Number Certificate that is included in the provided package.
• Device Serial Number
Press [Counter Check] on the control panel of your machine to view the device serial number.

1-24 Obtaining and Registering a License Key

Registering a License Key
You need to register a license key in your machine to activate certain functions.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings].

1

Before You Start Using This Machine

2 Press [▼] or [▲] until [License Registration] appears ➞ press [License
Registration].

3 Enter the license key using - (numeric keys) ➞ press [Start].

Details of each item are shown below.

[ ] [ ]: Press to move the position of the cursor.
[Backspace]: Press to delete the last number entered.

Obtaining and Registering a License Key 1-25

 If the following screen is displayed, press [OK] ➞ enter the correct license key.

1
Before You Start Using This Machine

If the following screen is displayed, the license key cannot be registered. Press [OK], and then
cancel the registration. Check if the required option or function is properly installed in the
machine.

The message <Installation was successful.> appears.

License registration is complete.

4 Press [OK].

5 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.

NOTE
The functions you have registered are enabled only after you restart your machine (the main
power switch is turned OFF, and then back ON again). (See “Main Power and Control Panel
Power” on p. 1-16.)

1-26 Obtaining and Registering a License Key

Basic Operations
This chapter describes the main features and basic operations of the machine.
2
CHAPTER

What This Machine Can Do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Overview of the iR2030/iR2025/iR2022i/iR2018i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Switching the Functions Indicated on the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
User Management and Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Specifying Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Functions That Conserve Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Checking and Canceling Print Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Other Useful Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Using the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Frequently Used Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Touch Panel Key Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Adjusting the Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Entering Characters from the Touch Panel Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Alphanumeric Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Values in Inches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Entering the Department ID and Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Using the User ID Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Placing Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Document Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Platen Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Feeder (DADF-P2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Multi-functional Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Available Paper Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56

2-1
 What This Machine Can Do

All the elements you will ever need in a digital multitasking

machine.
2 Copy
The iR2030/iR2025/iR2022i/iR2018i incorporates a rich
array range of input and output features that can greatly
enhance your efficiency.
Basic Operations

Print Send
Equipped with features that meet the needs of document
work in a digitized office, the iR2030/iR2025/iR2022i/
iR2018i represents the ultimate in digital multitasking
machines.
Scan Fax

Remote UI

Copying See the Copying Guide

In addition to normal copying functions, convenient A3 Original

new functions, such as Different Size Originals
Mode for copying originals of different sizes together
in one copy operation, are provided to increase your A4 Original
productivity.
Original
Feeding
Direction

Different Size Originals Mode

2-2 What This Machine Can Do

Sending* See the Sending and Facsimile Guide

The Send function enables you to send scanned

Original
image or document data to file servers, or send it by
e-mail or I-fax. A variety of file formats are supported
(TIFF and PDF (for sending black-and-white
scanned images or document data); and JPEG and
PDF (Compact) (for sending color scanned images
or document data)). These file formats offer you E-mail File I-Fax
greater flexibility in accommodating digital
workplace environments.
* To enable the Send function, the optional Color 2
Send Kit (standard for the iR2022i/iR2018i) must be

Basic Operations
activated.

Faxing* See the Sending and Facsimile Guide

This machine’s Super G3 fax function is compatible Original Fax

with most Super G3 fax machines used in office
environments. If the optional Super G3 FAX Board
and Fax Driver are installed, you can send facsimiles
from your computer.
* The optional Super G3 FAX Board is required.

Printing See the PCL/UFR II Printer Guide or UFR II Printer Guide

This machine uses UFRII LT (Ultra Fast Rendering II

LT) Technology, which utilizes a newly invented
printing algorithm to minimize file processing and
achieve maximum performance. Also, the PCL 1

Printer function* enables you to use the machine as

an emulation printer of PCL5e and PCL6. Sending data Printing
from computers
With the optional Barcode Printing Kit, you can also
use the BarDIMM function. (See the Bar Code
Printing Guide.)
* To enable the PCL Printer function, the optional PCL
Printer Kit (standard for the iR2022i/iR2018i) is required.

What This Machine Can Do 2-3

 Network Interface See the Network Guide

This machine can be connected to a network using Device Information

Ethernet (standard equipment). Connecting to a
network enables you to use utility software, including
the Remote UI, NetSpot*, etc.
* NetSpot enables you to manage and make various
settings for the printers and copiers connected to a network
from a PC.

2
Basic Operations

Manage

Using the Remote UI See the Remote UI Guide

You can control functions, such as confirming the

status of the machine, job operations, and printing
instructions, all from your PC’s Web browser.
Web
Browser

Network Scanning See the Color Network ScanGear User’s Guide

The Network Scan function enables you to use the

iR2030/iR2025/iR2022i/iR2018i as a conventional
scanner. You can scan a document using the Original
machine, and read the data in an application you are
using on your computer. To use this function, the
Scanning Exporting data
machine is required to be connected to a network,
image data to a computer
and the Color Network ScanGear software* installed
at your computer. You can scan images of up to A3
in size at a resolution of 600 x 600 dpi.
* The Color Network ScanGear software is supplied on the
accompanying CD-ROM. For more information on the
Network Scan function, see the Color Network ScanGear
User’s Guide.

2-4 What This Machine Can Do

Overview of the iR2030/iR2025/iR2022i/iR2018i

Most operations on this machine are executed from the touch panel display. By pressing the
keys according to the instructions on the touch panel display, you can utilize of the functions of
this machine efficiently.
2
CAUTION

Basic Operations
Press the touch panel display keys gently with your fingers. Do not press the touch panel
display with a pencil, ballpoint pen, or other sharp objects that can scratch the surface of the
touch panel display. Doing so may damage the touch panel display.

NOTE
Before using the touch panel display, peel off the protective film from the display.

Switching the Functions Indicated on the Touch Panel

Display
After the power is turned ON, the following screen appears on the touch panel display. You can
press (COPY), (SEND) , or (SCAN) on the control panel, or [System Monitor] on
the touch panel display to switch functions. (See “Initial Function at Power ON,” on p. 4-15.)
The area on the bottom of the touch panel display is used for messages that indicate the status
of the machine. Pressing [System Monitor] enables you to check the status of the various
devices, jobs, and consumables, and they are also displayed here.

NOTE
• If the optional Color Send Kit is not activated and the optional Super G3 FAX Board is not installed for
the iR2030/iR2025, the Send/Fax functions are not available even if you press (SEND).
• You can set the initial screen (the first screen that appears when the machine is turned ON) from the
Additional Functions screen. The initial screen can be the Copy, Send (Fax), Scan, or System Monitor
screen.

Overview of the iR2030/iR2025/iR2022i/iR2018i 2-5

 ■ Keys Displayed on the Touch Panel Display
The example shown below is the Copy Basic Features screen.

a Job/Print Status Display Area b System Monitor

The progress of jobs and copy operations, and Press this key to check or cancel jobs, and to
the status of devices and consumables are check the job log. You can also check the
displayed here. current status of the machine. (See Chapter 5,
“Checking Job and Device Status.”)

2
Basic Operations

a b

User Management and Restriction

A login service manages data relating to users using the machine. The following two login
services are available:

■ Department ID Management
If Department ID Management in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to ‘On’,
only the users who enter the correct Department ID and password (up to seven digits for each) can gain
access to the machine. (See “Department ID Management,” on p. 6-6.)

■ User ID Management
User ID Management that is linked to the Department ID Management function of this machine. You can
register user information from a web browser, such as IDs and passwords. (See the Remote UI Guide.)

2-6 Overview of the iR2030/iR2025/iR2022i/iR2018i

Specifying Settings
The Additional Functions screen appears when you press (Additional Functions). The
Additional Functions screen enables you to make common settings related to many functions of
the machine, as well as customize specific functions to suit your needs. For more information on
the settings not explained in this manual, see the following manuals:

• Copy Settings: The Copying Guide

• Report Settings, Communications Settings, The Sending and Facsimile Guide
Address Book Settings:
• Printer Settings: The PCL/UFR II Printer Guide or UFR II 2
Printer Guide

Basic Operations
• Network Settings: The Network Guide

The Additional Functions Screen

The System Settings Screen

Overview of the iR2030/iR2025/iR2022i/iR2018i 2-7

 NOTE
• Settings made from the Additional Functions screen are not changed even if you press (Reset).
• For instructions on customizing settings, see Chapter 4, “Customizing Settings.”
• For instructions on specifying System Settings, see Chapter 6, “System Manager Settings.”
• For instructions on specifying Printer Settings, see the PCL/UFR II Printer Guide or UFR II Printer
Guide.
• For instructions on specifying Network Settings, see the Network Guide.
• Communications Settings and Address Book Settings are displayed on the Additional Functions screen
only if the optional Color Send Kit (standard for the iR2022i/iR2018i) is activated, or the optional Super
G3 FAX Board is installed.
2 • Communications Settings, Forwarding Settings, Restrict the Send Function, and Failed Forwarding
Document Set. are displayed on the System Settings screen only if the optional Color Send Kit
Basic Operations

(standard for the iR2022i/iR2018i) is activated, or the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed.

2-8 Overview of the iR2030/iR2025/iR2022i/iR2018i

Functions That Conserve Power
You can conserve power efficiently by setting the Sleep mode.
You can set the machine to enter the Sleep mode whenever you desire, by pressing the control
panel power switch, or specify to have the machine enter the Sleep mode at a preset time (See
“Auto Sleep Time,” on p. 4-62). To reactivate the machine, press the control panel power switch
again.

NOTE
• The touch panel display turns OFF when the machine enters the Sleep mode. 2
• The machine can continue to receive I-fax/fax documents, and process or print data sent from

Basic Operations
computers even if the machine is in the Sleep mode.
• The machine may not enter the Sleep mode completely depending on certain conditions. (For more
information, see “Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode,” on p. 4-33.)
• Turn the control panel power switch OFF when not using the machine for a prolonged period of time, for
example, at night.
• The Sleep mode can be set from OFF (0) or 3 to 30 minutes. The default setting is ‘5 min(s).’ (See “Auto
Sleep Time,” on p. 4-65.)
• If Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode is set to ‘Low’, it may take more than 10 seconds for the touch
panel to be displayed after pressing the control panel power switch.

Overview of the iR2030/iR2025/iR2022i/iR2018i 2-9

 Checking and Canceling Print Jobs
The System Monitor screen enables you to check the status of the machine or cancel print jobs.

2
Basic Operations

The System Monitor Screen (Print)

The System Monitor Screen (Device)

2-10 Overview of the iR2030/iR2025/iR2022i/iR2018i

NOTE
• For instructions on checking the status of Copy, Fax, and Send jobs, see Chapter 5, “Checking Job and
Device Status,” in this manual and Chapter 7, “Checking/Changing the Send/Receive Status,” in the
Sending and Facsimile Guide.
• The icons that appear in the Job/Print Status Display Area (on the bottom left of the screen) indicate a
certain status of each job. The meanings of the icons are described as shown below:

Icon (Type of Job) Description

Copy Job

Send Job
2
Fax Job

Basic Operations
Printer Job

Report Job

Additional Functions Job

Icon (Machine Status) Description

Error
Paper Jam

Staple Jam

Replace Toner Cartridge

Overview of the iR2030/iR2025/iR2022i/iR2018i 2-11

 Other Useful Functions
Other useful functions include:

■ Auto Drawer Switching

If a paper drawer runs out of paper during printing, the machine automatically locates another paper
drawer loaded with the same size paper, and begins feeding paper from that paper drawer.

NOTE
• You can set whether a paper drawer is subject to Auto Drawer Switching for each function. The default
2 setting is ‘Off’ for the stack bypass, and ‘On’ for the other paper drawer(s). (See “Auto Paper Selection/
Auto Drawer Switching,” on p. 4-27.)
Basic Operations

• When you set ‘Off’ for the stack bypass and no optional cassette feeding module attached, Auto Drawer
Switching cannot be used for the iR2018i.

■ Auto Clear
If the machine is not used for a period of approximately two minutes after the last print job or key
operation is performed, the machine automatically restores the standard settings.

NOTE
• You can set the Auto Clear Time from 0 to 9 minutes in one minute increments. The default setting is ‘2’
minutes. (See “Auto Clear Time,” on p. 4-67.)
• The Auto Clear mode does not activate if Auto Clear Time is set to ‘0’.

2-12 Overview of the iR2030/iR2025/iR2022i/iR2018i

■ Paper Supply Indicator
The paper supply indicator shows whether paper is loaded in each paper drawer. appears on the
Paper Select screen when paper is loaded in a paper drawer. blinks on the screen that appears
when paper in a paper drawer has run out during printing. (See Chapter 2, “Basic Copying Features,” in
the Copying Guide.)

Basic Operations
Paper Supply Indicator
The Paper Select Screen

The Screen When Paper Has Run Out

Overview of the iR2030/iR2025/iR2022i/iR2018i 2-13

 ■ Auto Orientation
Using information, such as the size of the original and zoom ratio, the machine automatically rotates the
image to the most suitable orientation for the selected paper size.

If the image, after it is rotated, does not fit onto the paper, the machine will not rotate the image, and will
print it as is, with part of the image cut off.

Even if Auto Orientation is set to ‘On’, the image is not rotated when the Different Size Originals mode is
set. (See Chapter 4, “Customizing Settings,” in the Copying Guide.)

2
Basic Operations

2-14 Overview of the iR2030/iR2025/iR2022i/iR2018i

Using the Touch Panel Display

This section describes the keys that are frequently used on the touch panel display. Information
on how to adjust the brightness of the touch panel display is also provided.

CAUTION 2
Press the touch panel display keys gently with your fingers. Do not press the touch panel

Basic Operations
display with a pencil, ballpoint pen, or other sharp objects that can scratch the surface of the
touch panel display. Doing so may damage the touch panel display.

NOTE
Before using the touch panel display, peel off the protective film from the display.

Frequently Used Keys

The keys that are used frequently on the touch panel display are:

Press to cancel the mode that you are currently setting, or a mode that has already been
set, on screens other than the Additional Functions screen. Also, press to close the
current mode’s setting screen, and keep the original settings set from the Additional
Functions screen.

Press to confirm the current settings and proceed to the next step in the procedure.

Press to go back to the previous step in the procedure, without saving the current
settings.

Press to close the current screen.

Press to confirm the current settings of a mode.

Using the Touch Panel Display 2-15

 Touch Panel Key Display
When you press a key on the touch panel display, that key is highlighted, and the corresponding
mode is set. When you set certain modes, the characters on some keys may become grayed
out. You cannot press keys that are grayed out. This means that you cannot set these modes in
combination with the presently set mode.

■ Mode Setting Keys

State of Keys Description
2 The 2-Page Separation mode is not set, and can
be selected.
Basic Operations

The 2-Page Separation mode is set, and can be

selected.
(The key is highlighted)

The 2-Page Separation mode cannot be set in

combination with the presently set mode.
(The characters on the key are grayed out.)

■ Keys That Indicate When a Mode Is Turned On or Off

Mode Is Turned Off Mode Is Turned On

(Highlighted)

2-16 Using the Touch Panel Display

 Keys with a right triangle ( ) indicate that those keys have additional screens to set their functions. If you
press a key that does not have a right triangle ( ), it turns that mode on or off.

Keys That Display Additional Settings Keys That Turn Modes On/Off

Keys with a black square ( ) in the lower right corner, that appear on screens for storing settings,
already have settings stored in them.

Settings Are Stored No Settings Are Stored

2

Basic Operations
■ Keys That Display a Drop-Down List
Pressing a key that has a right triangle ( ) to the right of the name of the selection, displays a drop-down
list containing other setting options.

Before Selection Drop-Down List After Selection

■ Numeric Keys
Anytime the numeric keys icon is displayed on the screen, you can use the numeric keys on the control
panel to enter values.

You can enter values using the numeric keys on the

touch panel display or on the control panel.

You can only enter values using the numeric keys on

the control panel.

Using the Touch Panel Display 2-17

 Adjusting the Brightness
If the touch panel display is difficult to view, use the display contrast dial on the control panel to
adjust its brightness.

Lighter Darker
2
Basic Operations

NOTE
To make the touch panel display brighter, turn the dial counterclockwise. To make it darker, turn the dial
clockwise.

2-18 Using the Touch Panel Display

Entering Characters from the Touch Panel
Display

For screens that require alphanumeric entries, enter characters using the keys displayed on the
touch panel display, as shown below.

2
Alphanumeric Characters

Basic Operations
Example: Enter <Canon>.

1 To enter alphanumeric characters, make sure that <Alphabet> is

displayed above [Entry Mode].

Each press of [Entry Mode] switches the entry mode between <Alphabet> and <Other>.

Entering Characters from the Touch Panel Display 2-19

 2 Enter <Canon>.
To enter uppercase letters, press [Shift].
To enter a space, press [Space].
To move the cursor, press [ ] or [ ].
To enter symbols, press [Entry Mode] to select [Other] ➞ enter the desired symbols.
The characters you entered are displayed, as shown below.

2
Basic Operations

NOTE
• If you make a mistake when entering characters, press [ ] or [ ] to position the cursor on the
right side of the characters to be deleted ➞ press [Backspace] to delete the characters ➞ enter
the correct characters.
• To delete all of the characters you have entered, press (Clear).
• The available entry modes, and the maximum number of characters that you can enter vary,
depending on the type of entries you are making.

3 When you have entered all characters, press [OK].

2-20 Entering Characters from the Touch Panel Display

Symbols
Example: Enter <é>.

1 Press [Entry Mode] to select [Other].

Basic Operations
Each press of [Entry Mode] switches the entry mode between <Alphabet> and <Other>.

2 Press [▼] or [▲] to display the desired symbol that you want to enter.

Entering Characters from the Touch Panel Display 2-21

 3 Press [é].
To enter a space, press [Space].
To move the cursor, press [ ] or [ ].
To enter alphanumeric characters, press [Entry Mode] to select [Alphabet] ➞ enter the desired
characters.
The characters you entered are displayed, as shown below.

2
Basic Operations

NOTE
• If you make a mistake when entering characters, press [ ] or [ ] to position the cursor on the
right side of the characters to be deleted ➞ press [Backspace] to delete the characters ➞ enter
the correct characters.
• To delete all of the characters you have entered, press (Clear).
• The available entry modes, and the maximum number of characters that you can enter vary,
depending on the type of entries you are making.

2-22 Entering Characters from the Touch Panel Display

4 When you have entered all characters, press [OK].

Basic Operations

Entering Characters from the Touch Panel Display 2-23

 Values in Inches
If you want to enter values in inches in all modes which require a numeric entry, set Inch Entry
to ‘On’ in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See “Inch Entry,” on
p. 4-25.) This enables you to enter values in inches when you press [Inch] on a screen requiring
a numeric entry or measurement.
The following example shows you how to enter 5 1/2" for X value in the Irregular Size mode.

2
1 Press [5] ➞ [_] ➞ [1] ➞ [/] ➞ [2] using the numeric keys on the touch
Basic Operations

panel display.

The entered values are displayed, as shown above.

NOTE
• If you make a mistake when entering values, press [C] on the touch panel display ➞ enter the
correct values.
• You can enter only 2, 4, 8, or 16 as the denominator.
• The value entered in inches is converted to millimeters by the machine each time it is entered.
Thus, there may be a slight difference between the value calculated and the actual value
entered.
• To enter values in millimeters, press [mm].

2-24 Entering Characters from the Touch Panel Display

Entering the Department ID and Password

If Department ID Management has been set, the Department ID and password must be entered
before using this machine.

NOTE 2
• For instructions on setting the Department ID and password, see “Department ID Management,” on

Basic Operations
p. 6-6.
• If you are using a control card for Department ID Management, the message <You must insert a control
card.> appears on the touch panel display. Insert the control card into the card slot. (See “Card
Reader-E1,” on p. 3-19.)
• The use of some functions may be restricted, and a screen asking you to enter your Department ID and
password or insert your control card may appear while you are using the machine. Follow the
instructions on the touch panel display to continue using the selected function.
• If User ID Management is set to ‘On’, see “Using the User ID Management,” on p. 2-29.

Entering the Department ID and Password 2-25

 1 Use - (numeric keys) to enter your Department ID and password.
❑ Press [Department ID] ➞ enter your Department ID.
❑ Press [Password] ➞ enter the password.

2
Basic Operations

If no password has been set, proceed to step 2.

The numbers that you enter for the password are displayed as asterisks (*******).

NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering the Department ID or password, press (Clear) ➞ enter
the correct values.

2-26 Entering the Department ID and Password

2 Press (Log In/Out).

Basic Operations
The Basic Features screen of the selected function appears on the touch panel display.

NOTE
• If using Department ID Management, the Department ID and message <After using the
machine, press the ID key.> are displayed alternately at the bottom of the touch panel display.
• If the Department ID or password that you entered is incorrect, the message <This number has
not been registered. Enter the number again.> appears. Repeat this procedure from step 1.

Entering the Department ID and Password 2-27

 3 When your operations are complete, press (Log In/Out) on the
control panel.
If you are using a control card, remove the control card, and take it with you. (See “Card
Reader-E1,” on p. 3-19.)

2
Basic Operations

The screen for entering the Department ID and password appears.

NOTE
• To perform operations again, you have to re-enter your Department ID and password.
• If you do not press (Log In/Out) after you are finished operating the machine, any subsequent
copies and scans for Send/Fax functions made are added to the total of the Department ID you
previously entered.
• Even if you forget to press (Log In/Out) after you are finished operating the machine, the
screen for entering the Department ID and password automatically appears after the set Auto
Clear Time elapses. (See “Auto Clear Time,” on p. 4-67.)
• After pressing (Log In/Out), all settings are canceled, and the machine returns to the screen
for entering the Department ID and password.

2-28 Entering the Department ID and Password

Using the User ID Management

If you are managing the machine with the User ID Management, enter the User ID and
password before using this machine.

IMPORTANT 2
Register User IDs and passwords before setting the User ID Management to ‘On’.

Basic Operations
NOTE
For instructions on how to register a User ID and password, see the Remote UI Guide.

1 Press [User ID].

NOTE
You can use only alphanumeric characters for User IDs and passwords.

Using the User ID Management 2-29

 ❑ Enter the User ID ➞ press [OK].
You can also enter values using - (numeric keys).
❑ Press [Password].
❑ Enter the password ➞ press [OK].
You can also enter the password using - (numeric keys).
❑ Press (Log In/Out).
The Basic Features screen of the selected function appears on the touch panel display.
If the User ID or password that you entered is incorrect, a message appears prompting you
to verify your User ID and password. Repeat this procedure from step 1.

2
2 When your operations are complete, press (Log In/Out) on the
Basic Operations

control panel.

The screen for entering the User ID and password appears.

NOTE
• To perform operations again, you have to re-enter the User ID and password.
• If you do not press (Log In/Out) after you are finished operating the machine, any subsequent
copies and scans for Send/Fax functions made are added to the total of the User ID you
previously entered.
• Even if you forget to press (Log In/Out) after you are finished operating the machine, the
screen for entering the User ID and password automatically appears after the set Auto Clear
Time elapses. (See “Auto Clear Time,” on p. 4-67.)
• After pressing (Log In/Out), all settings are canceled, and the machine returns to the screen
for entering the User ID and password.

2-30 Using the User ID Management

Placing Originals

Place your originals on the platen glass or into the feeder, depending on the size and type of
originals that you want to copy or fax, and the settings that you have programmed.

■ Platen Glass 2
Place the originals on the platen glass when scanning bound originals, heavy or lightweight originals,

Basic Operations
and transparencies.

■ Feeder
Place the originals into the feeder when you want to scan several originals at the same time, and press
(Start). The machine automatically feeds the originals to the scanning area and scans them.
Two-sided originals can also be automatically turned over and scanned as two-sided documents.

Document Sizes
If your machine is the iR2030/iR2025/iR2022i, or if your machine is the iR2018i and you place
your originals into the feeder, the size of the original is automatically detected and the document
is scanned. However, if the output paper in the recipient’s machine is not equal to the scanned
size, the original image may be reduced in size or divided into smaller parts before it is sent.
If you place the original on the platen glass of the iR2018i, or if the machine cannot detect the
size of the original correctly (e.g. nonstandard paper size or a book), specify the size at which
you want to scan the original. (See Chapter 2, “Basic Copying Features,” in the Copying Guide.)

Placing Originals 2-31

 Orientation
You can place an original either vertically or horizontally. Always align the top edge of your
original with the back edge of the platen glass (upper left corner) or the feeder.

Platen Glass

Place
original
2 face down
Basic Operations

Place original
face down

Vertical Placement Horizontal Placement

Feeder

ABC
Place ABC Place
original original
face up face up

Vertical Placement Horizontal Placement

2-32 Placing Originals

IMPORTANT
• Copies are stapled at the corner that corresponds to the upper left corner of the original.
• If an original is scanned facing the wrong direction, the sender’s information is not printed in the correct
position on the fax.

NOTE
• If the top edge of the original is not aligned with the back edge of the platen glass, your original may not
be scanned correctly, depending on the mode you have set.
• A4 and A5 originals can be placed either vertically or horizontally. However, the scanning speed for
horizontally placed originals is somewhat slower than for vertically placed originals. Place originals
horizontally when printing with a preset zoom, such as when enlarging an A4 original onto A3 paper. 2
• Horizontally placed A4 and A5 originals are referred to as A4R and A5R.

Basic Operations
• A3 originals must be placed horizontally.
• To get the same output orientation using the feeder as when the original is placed on the platen glass,
place it upside-down and face up. However, if an appropriate size of paper is not loaded in the Staple
mode, the output is rotated automatically.
• You can make two-sided copies from one-sided or two-sided originals. For details about how to use
2-Sided function, see Chapter 2, “Basic Copying Features,” in the Copying Guide.

Placing Originals 2-33

 Platen Glass
Place the originals on the platen glass when scanning bound originals (such as books and
magazines), originals of heavy or lightweight paper, and transparencies.

NOTE
If you place your originals on the platen glass of the iR2018i, the machine cannot detect the originals
size. You should select the paper size for the copies manually. (See Chapter 2, “Basic Copying
Features,” in the Copying Guide.)

2
1
Basic Operations

Lift the feeder/platen cover.

Open/Close Sensor

IMPORTANT
When placing originals on the platen glass of the iR2030/iR2025/iR2022i, lift the feeder/platen
cover high enough so that the open/close sensor (located within the circled area in the preceding
illustration) is fully released. Otherwise, the machine may not correctly detect the size of the
originals.

2-34 Placing Originals

2 Place your originals face down.

Basic Operations
The surface of the original that you want to copy must be placed face down. Align the corner of
the original with the top left corner (the arrow) of the platen glass.

Place books and other bound originals on the platen glass in the same way.

NOTE
When you are enlarging an A4 or A5 original onto A3 paper, place the original horizontally on the
platen glass, and align it with the A4R or A5R marks.

Placing Originals 2-35

 3 Gently close the feeder/platen cover.

2
Basic Operations

CAUTION
• Close the feeder/platen cover gently so that your hand is not caught, otherwise
personal injury may result.
• Do not press down hard on the feeder/platen cover when using the platen glass to
make copies of thick books. Doing so may damage the platen glass and result in
personal injury.

2-36 Placing Originals

NOTE
• The iR2030/iR2025/iR2022i can detect the size of the original placed on the platen glass. If you
are placing the original on the platen glass, the size of the original is detected after the feeder/
platen cover is closed. Be sure to close the feeder/platen cover before scanning.
• Remove the original from the platen glass when scanning is complete.

Basic Operations
• The originals smaller than A5 in size cannot be detected. After pressing (Start), follow the
instructions on the screen to specify the original size. You can also manually select the paper
size.

Placing Originals 2-37

 Feeder (DADF-P2)
You should use the feeder when you want to copy several originals at the same time. Place the
originals into the feeder and press (Start). The machine automatically feeds the originals to
the platen glass and scans them. Two-sided originals can also be automatically turned over and
scanned as two-sided documents.
You can place the following originals into the feeder:
Weight:

2 - 52 g/m2 to 105 g/m2

Size:
Basic Operations

- A3, A4, A4R, A5, A5R.

Tray capacity:
- A4, A4R, A5, A5R: 50 sheets (80 g/m2)
- A3: 25 sheets (80 g/m2)

IMPORTANT
• Thin originals may become creased, if used in a high-temperature or high-humidity environment.
• Do not place the following types of originals into the feeder:
- Originals with tears or large binding holes
- Severely curled originals or originals with sharp folds
- Clipped or stapled originals
- Carbon-backed paper or other originals which may not feed smoothly
- Transparencies and other highly transparent originals
• If the same original is fed through the feeder repeatedly, the original may fold or become creased, and
make feeding impossible. Limit repeated feeding to a maximum of 30 times (this number varies,
depending on the type and quality of the original).
• If the feeder rollers are dirty from scanning an original written with pencil, clean the feeder. (See
“Manual Feeder Cleaning,” on p. 7-37.)
• Always smooth out any folds in your originals before placing them into the feeder.
• Set the originals one by one if they are very thin (37 g/m2 to 52 g/m2) or very thick (105 g/m2 to
128 g/m2).

2-38 Placing Originals

1 Adjust the slide guides to fit the size of your originals.

Basic Operations
2 Neatly place your originals with the side to be copied face up into the
original supply tray.
When enlarging A4 or A5 originals to A3 paper, place your originals horizontally.
Place the originals as far as they will go.

Placing Originals 2-39

 If any dirt on the original scanning area is detected when the originals are placed in the feeder,
the following screen appears. Clean the original scanning area, or you can proceed scanning
after pressing [Done]. For instructions on cleaning the original scanning area, see Chapter 7,
“Routine Maintenance.”

2
Basic Operations

IMPORTANT
• Do not add or remove originals while they are being scanned.
• When scanning is complete, remove the originals from the original output area to avoid paper
jams.

Original Output Area

NOTE
• The scanned originals are output to the original output area in the order that they are fed into the
feeder.
• You can place different size originals together into the feeder if you set the Different Size
Originals mode. (See Chapter 3, “Special Copying Features,” in the Copying Guide.)

2-40 Placing Originals

Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass

If you are making prints on labels, transparencies, nonstandard paper size stock, or envelopes,
load the paper stock into the stack bypass.

IMPORTANT 2
• Note the following points when using the stack bypass:

Basic Operations
- Paper Quantity: one to 80 sheets (80 g/m2, stack approximately 5 mm high)
- Paper Size: 95 mm x 148 mm to 297 mm x 432 mm
- Paper Weight: 64 to 128 g/m2
- Paper which has been rolled or curled must be straightened out prior to use, to allow the paper to feed
smoothly through the stack bypass (allowable curl amount: less than 10 mm for normal paper, less
than 5 mm for heavyweight paper).
- Depending on the paper storage conditions, it may not be possible to feed some paper into the stack
bypass. In this case, set the amount of paper to less than 40 sheets (80 g/m2).
• Do not load different size/type paper at the same time.
• Depending on the type of heavyweight paper you want to load, if you load multiple sheets of
heavyweight paper into the stack bypass, a paper jam may occur. In this case, load only one sheet of
heavyweight paper at a time.
• When printing on special types of paper, such as heavyweight paper or transparencies, be sure to
correctly set the paper type, especially if you are using heavyweight paper. If the type of paper is not set
correctly, it could adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the fixing unit may become dirty
and require a service repair, or the paper could jam.
• If you are printing on envelopes, do not allow more than 10 envelopes to accumulate in the output tray.
Always empty the output tray once 10 envelopes have accumulated.
• If you select [Irreg. Size] for copying, you cannot use the Rotate Collate, Rotate Group, Offset Collate,
Offset Group, Staple, 1 2-Sided, 2 2-Sided, Book 2-Sided, 2-Page Separation, or Image
Combination mode. (See Chapter 5, “Appendix,” in the Copying Guide.)
• If you select [Envelope] for copying, you cannot use the finishing modes, 1 2-Sided, 2 2-Sided, Book
2-Sided, 2-Page Separation, or Image Combination mode. (See Chapter 5, “Appendix,” in the Copying
Guide.)

Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass 2-41

 NOTE
• Envelopes may be creased in the printing process.
• For high-quality printouts, use paper recommended by Canon.
• For more information on paper types that can be used with this machine, see “Available Paper Stock,”
on p. 2-56.

■ Standard Size
You can select standard A series paper, or Inch or B series paper.

■ Irregular Size
2 You can load nonstandard paper sizes (95 mm x 148 mm to 297 mm x 432 mm).
Basic Operations

■ Envelope
The following envelopes can be loaded into the stack bypass:
• COM10: 104.7 mm x 241.3 mm
• Monarch: 98.4 mm x 190.5 mm
• DL: 110 mm x 220 mm
• ISO-C5: 162 mm x 229 mm
• ISO-B5: 250 mm x 176 mm
For more information on specific envelope types, see “Available Paper Stock,” on p. 2-56.

2-42 Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass

1 Open the stack bypass.

Basic Operations
NOTE
If the paper size you are going to load into the stack bypass is different from the paper size
stored in Stack Bypass Standard Settings, set Stack Bypass Standard Settings to ‘Off’ in
Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See “Standard Paper for the Stack
Bypass,” on p. 4-38.)

Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass 2-43

 2 Adjust the slide guides to match the size of the paper.

2
Basic Operations

Slide Guide
If you are feeding large size paper, pull out the auxiliary tray, and extend the tray extension.

Tray Auxiliary Tray

Extension

2-44 Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass

3 Load the paper into the stack bypass.
❑ Make sure that the height of the paper stack does not exceed the loading limit mark ( ).

Basic Operations
❑ When you use the stack bypass to make copies, straighten out curled paper prior to use, as
shown below.

Feeding Direction

Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass 2-45

 IMPORTANT
Curled paper may cause a paper jam.
❑ If there is difficulty in straightening out curled paper, curl the front edges of the paper
upward, as shown below.

2
Basic Operations

Feeding Direction

❑ To print on the back side of preprinted paper, load the preprinted paper face up into the
stack bypass, as shown in the illustration below.

Feeding
Direction

The screen for selecting the paper size appears.

2-46 Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass

 IMPORTANT
• When loading paper into the stack bypass, align the paper stack neatly between the slide guides.
If the paper is not loaded correctly, a paper jam may occur.
• If you are printing on heavyweight paper or envelopes using the stack bypass, and find that the
paper or envelopes are not being fed smoothly or evenly through the stack bypass, remove the
paper or envelopes, curl the feeding edges upward approximately 3 mm, and then reload the
paper or envelopes. Curling the feeding edges enables the rollers to grip the paper or envelopes
as they are fed into the stack bypass.

NOTE
• If there are instructions on the paper package about which side of the paper to load, follow those
instructions. 2
• When the paper is loaded into the stack bypass, the side facing down is the one printed on.

Basic Operations
• If problems, such as poor print quality or paper jams occur, try turning the paper stack over and
reload it.
• For more information on the print direction of preprinted paper (paper which has logos or
patterns already printed on it), see “Relationship between Original Orientation and Preprinted
Paper Output Chart,” on p. 9-9.

● If you are loading envelopes into the stack bypass:

❑ Take five envelopes, loosen them as shown, and then stack them together. Repeat this step
five times for each set of five envelopes.

Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass 2-47

 ❑ Place the envelopes on a clean, level surface, and press all the way around the envelopes
by hand, in the direction of the arrows, to remove any curls. Repeat this step five times for
each set of five envelopes.

2
Basic Operations

IMPORTANT
Take particular care to spread the envelopes out in the direction that they will be fed.
❑ Hold down the four corners of the envelopes firmly, so that they and the sealed or glued
portion stay flat.

Flap

2-48 Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass

IMPORTANT
• Do not print on the back side of the envelopes (the side with the flap).
• If the envelopes become filled with air, flatten them by hand before loading them into the stack
bypass.

Basic Operations
Flap

❑ Load the envelopes, as shown below.

Feeding
Direction

The screen for selecting the paper size appears.

IMPORTANT
• The stack bypass can hold 10 envelopes at a time.
• Envelopes may be creased in the printing process.

Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass 2-49

 4 Select the desired paper size.

NOTE
The paper size/type setting in the [Stack Bypass] setting screen is available if Stack Bypass
Standard Settings is set to ‘Off’ in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). If
Stack Bypass Standard Settings is set to ‘On’, copying can be performed only for the registered
paper size and type. (See “Standard Paper for the Stack Bypass,” on p. 4-38.)

● If you want to select a standard paper size:

❑ Select the desired paper size ➞ press [Next].
2
Basic Operations

NOTE
To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].
❑ Select the desired paper type ➞ press [OK].

2-50 Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass

 IMPORTANT
When printing on special types of paper, such as heavyweight paper or transparencies, be sure
to correctly set the paper type, especially if you are using heavyweight paper. If the type of paper
is not set correctly, it could adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the fixing unit may
become dirty and require a service repair, or the paper could jam.

NOTE
• If you select [Transparency] or [Labels], you cannot use the Rotate Collate, Rotate Group, Offset
Collate, Offset Group, or Staple mode.
• [Transparency] can be selected only if [A4] is selected as the paper size.
• For more information on paper types, see “Available Paper Stock,” on p. 2-56. 2
● If you want to select a nonstandard paper size:

Basic Operations
❑ Press [Irreg. Size].

❑ Press [X] to specify the horizontal axis of the paper ➞ enter a value.
❑ Press [Y] to specify the vertical axis of the paper size ➞ enter a value.
❑ Press [OK].

The display returns to the paper size selection screen.

Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass 2-51

 NOTE
• If you make a mistake when entering values, press [C] on the touch panel display ➞ enter the
correct values.
• To enter values in inches, press [Inch]. (See “Values in Inches,” on p. 2-24.)
• When entering the value in millimeters, you can also use - (numeric keys), and (Clear)
to clear your entry.
• You can change the value by pressing [-] or [+] in increments of 1.0 mm, even if you have entered
the value.
• If you enter a value outside the setting range, [OK] is grayed out and cannot be selected. Enter
an appropriate value.
2 • You can use values for [X] between 148 mm and 432 mm, and for [Y] between 95 mm and 297
mm.
❑
Basic Operations

Press [Next].
❑ Select the desired paper type ➞ press [OK].

IMPORTANT
• When printing on special types of paper, such as heavyweight paper, be sure to correctly set the
paper type, especially if you are using heavyweight paper. If the type of paper is not set correctly,
it could adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the fixing unit may become dirty and
require a service repair, or the paper could jam.
• If you select [Irreg. Size], you cannot use the Rotate Collate, Rotate Group, Offset Collate, Offset
Group, Staple, 1 2-Sided, 2 2-Sided, Book 2-Sided, 2-Page Separation, or Image
Combination mode.

NOTE
For more information on paper types, see “Available Paper Stock,” on p. 2-56.

2-52 Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass

● If you want to select an envelope size:
❑ Press [Envelope].

Basic Operations
❑ Select the envelope type ➞ press [OK].

IMPORTANT
• If the envelope type is not selected correctly, a paper jam may occur.
• If you select [Envelope], you cannot use the finishing modes, 1 2-Sided, 2 2-Sided, Book
2-Sided, 2-Page Separation, or Image Combination mode.
❑ Press [OK].

Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass 2-53

 5 Press [Done].

2
Basic Operations

The display returns to the Copy Basic Features screen, and the selected paper size and type
are displayed.

6 If the Copy function is selected, place your originals ➞ select the

desired copy settings.

7 Press (Start).
Copying starts.

NOTE
To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Basic Features screen, press (Reset).

2-54 Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass

Multi-functional Operations

The iR2030/iR2025/iR2022i/iR2018i offers the user many functions, such as printing, scanning,
copying, and sending, which can be used together. The following tables provide you with the
details of multi-functional operations.
2
: Available

Basic Operations
: Unavailable
: Available, but with condition

Current Jobs Copy Printer

Scanning Printing Receiving Printing

Next Jobs Data
Copy
Scanning
Direct TX
Memory TX
Send
Memory RX
Printing of Auto
RX Documents
Receiving Data
Printer
Printing

: Available
: Unavailable
: Available, but with condition
Current Jobs Send
Printing of
Scanning Direct Memory Memory Auto RX
Next Jobs TX TX RX Documents
Copy
Scanning
Direct TX
Send Memory TX
Memory RX
Printing of Auto
RX Documents
Receiving Data
Printer
Printing

Multi-functional Operations 2-55

 Available Paper Stock

The paper types that can be used with this machine are shown in the following table. Icons
indicating the type of paper loaded in each paper drawer can be displayed on the paper
selection screen if you store that information in the machine beforehand. (See “Identifying the
2 Type of Paper in a Paper Source,” on p. 4-30.)

: Available
Basic Operations

: Unavailable

Paper Source
Paper Type Paper Drawer Stack Bypass
(64 to 90 g/m2) (64 to 128 g/m2)

Plain*1

Recycled*1

Color*1

Bond *2

Transparency *3

Heavy 1*4

Heavy 2*5

Heavy 3*6

Labels

Envelopes

*1 From 64 g/m2 to 80 g/m2

*2 From 75 g/m2 to 90 g/m2
*3 Use only A4 transparencies made especially for this machine.
*4 From 81 g/m2 to 90 g/m2
*5 From 91 g/m2 to 105 g/m2
*6 From 106 g/m2 to 128 g/m2

2-56 Available Paper Stock

 : Available
: Unavailable

Paper Source

Paper Size Width x Length Paper Paper

Stack
Drawer Drawer
Bypass
1 2, 3, 4
A3 297 mm x 420 mm

A4 297 mm x 210 mm

A4R 210 mm x 297 mm 2

A5 210 mm x 148 mm

Basic Operations
A5R 148 mm x 210 mm

COM 10 104.7 mm x 241.3 mm

Monarch 98.4 mm x 190.5 mm

Envelope DL 110 mm x 220 mm

ISO-B5 250 mm x 176 mm

ISO-C5 162 mm x 229 mm

95 mm x 148 mm to
Irregular Size
297 mm x 432 mm

NOTE
• For instructions on loading paper, see the following sections:
- Paper Drawers: “Loading Paper,” on p. 7-2
- Stack Bypass: “Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass,” on p. 2-41
• Paper drawers 2, 3, and 4 are optional for the iR2018i, and paper drawers 3 and 4 are optional for the
iR2030/iR2025/iR2022i.

Available Paper Stock 2-57

 2
Basic Operations

2-58 Available Paper Stock

Optional Equipment
This chapter describes the uses of optional equipment, and their special functions.
3
CHAPTER

System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Sample System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Available Combination of Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Cassette Feeding Module-P1/Q1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Parts and Their Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Optional Accessory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Feeder (DADF-P2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Parts and Their Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Platen Cover Type J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Parts and Their Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Finisher-U2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Parts and Their Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Finishing Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Inner 2 Way Tray-E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Parts and Their Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Card Reader-E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Procedure before Using the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Procedure after Using the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Department ID Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Accepting Print and Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40

3-1
 System Configuration

This section provides you with illustrations of all the optional equipment that can be attached to
the machine, and shows you examples of different system configurations.

Optional Equipment
3
Optional Equipment

3-2 System Configuration

a Platen Cover Type J f Feeder (DADF-P2)
The Platen Cover Type J secures the originals placed on Originals placed in the feeder are automatically fed sheet
the platen glass. by sheet to the scanning area of the platen glass. The
feeder also automatically turns over two-sided originals to
b Inner 2 Way Tray-E2
make one- or two-sided copies.
Attaching the Inner 2 Way Tray-E2 enables you to have two
output trays. g Document Tray-J1
Located on the top right side of the machine, and can be
c Cassette Feeding Module-P1
used for originals waiting to be scanned, or that have
(For the iR2018i Only) already been scanned. You can also use the document tray
The Cassette Feeding Module-P1 provides an additional for storing the manuals required for operating the machine
paper source for printing jobs. The paper drawer holds up inside.
to 250 sheets of paper (80 g/m2).
h Card Reader-E1
d Cassette Feeding Module-Q1 The Card Reader-E1 enables Department ID Management
The Cassette Feeding Module-Q1 provides two additional to be performed automatically.
paper sources for printing jobs.
Each paper drawer holds up to 250 sheets of paper i Additional Finisher Tray-C1
(80 g/m2). The Additional Finisher Tray-C1 can be attached to the
e Duplex Unit-B1
optional Finisher-U2 to provide an additional paper output 3
tray.
The Duplex Unit-B1 enables you to use the 2-Sided mode

Optional Equipment
for copying or printing. j Finisher-U2
The Finisher-U2 is equipped with the following features:
Collate, Group, Offset, and Staple (Corner).

NOTE
• The Duplex Unit-B1 is standard equipment for the iR2030/iR2025.
• The optional Inner 2 Way Tray-E2 cannot be used with the optional Finisher-U2.

System Configuration 3-3

 Sample System Configurations
Different types of optional equipment can be attached to the machine to form various system
configurations. The illustrations shown below are examples of the possible system
configurations. For more information on the complete range of optional equipment and system
configurations available, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

The iR2022i with the optional Inner 2 Way Tray-E2,

Cassette Feeding Module-Q1, and Card Reader-E1 attached

3
Optional Equipment

3-4 System Configuration

System Options
Installing system related optional accessories enables you to expand the functionality of the
machine. This section describes the system related optional accessories and their functions.

■ PCL Printer Kit

The PCL Printer Kit supports PCL5e and PCL6 emulation printing solutions.

NOTE
The PCL Printer Kit is standard equipment for the iR2022i/iR2018i.

■ Barcode Printing Kit

With the optional Barcode Printing Kit, you can also use the BarDIMM function. 3

Optional Equipment
■ Super G3 FAX Board
Installing the Super G3 FAX Board enables you to fax documents that have been created in applications
directly from your PC via a network.

NOTE
The Canon Fax Driver is supplied with the Super G3 FAX Board, and enables you to send fax images
from a computer via the machine.

■ Color Send Kit

The Color Send Kit enables you to send scanned documents by e-mail or I-fax, as well as send scanned
data to be stored in file servers.

NOTE
The Color Send Kit is standard equipment for the iR2022i/iR2018i.

System Configuration 3-5

 Available Combination of Options
The table shown below describes the optional equipment required for the use for each function
and the limitations in installing the optional equipment.

Optional Equipment Simultaneous Installation

Machine Function
Needed Required Limitations
The Platen Cover Type-J and
feeder (DADF-P2) cannot be
Platen Cover Type-J or installed together. If only the
Copy Function -
Feeder (DADF-P2)*1 Platen Cover Type-J is attached,
some functions may be
unavailable.
3 The Platen Cover Type-J and
feeder (DADF-P2) cannot be
Platen Cover Type-J or installed together. If only the
Optional Equipment

-
Feeder (DADF-P2)*1 Platen Cover Type-J is attached,
Send Function*2 some functions may be
unavailable.
To enable the Send function, the
Color Send Kit -
Color Send Kit must be activated.
The Platen Cover Type-J and
feeder (DADF-P2) cannot be
Platen Cover Type-J or installed together. If only the
-
Fax Function Feeder (DADF-P2)*1 Platen Cover Type-J is attached,
some functions may be
unavailable.
Super G3 FAX Board - -
PCL Printer Function*3 PCL Printer Kit - -
Bar Code Printing
Barcode Printing Kit PCL Printer Kit -
Function
Collate
Group The Inner 2 Way Tray-E2 cannot
Finisher-U2 -
Offset be used with the Finisher-U2.
Staple
The Finisher-U2 and the
Additional Finisher Tray-C1
Inner 2 Way Tray-E2
cannot be used with the Inner 2
Additional Copy Tray Way Tray-E2.
Additional Finisher
Finisher-U2 -
Tray-C1

3-6 System Configuration

 Optional Equipment Simultaneous Installation
Machine Function
Needed Required Limitations
2-Sided Copying/
Duplex Unit-B1*5 - -
Faxing*4
Department ID
Card Reader-E1 - -
Management*6
Cassette Feeding Module-P1
Cassette Feeding
Additional Paper Supply - cannot be used with the iR2030/
Module-P1 or -Q1
iR2025/iR2022i.
*1 The feeder (DADF-P2) is standard for the iR2022i/iR2018i.
*2 The Send function is standard for the iR2022i/iR2018i.
*3 The PCL Printer function is standard for the iR2022i/iR2018i.
*4 When a two-sided original is placed in the feeder, the machine automatically scans both sides and sends a two-paged fax if the 2-Sided
mode is selected. Two-sided fax receiving is available only when the optional Duplex Unit-B1(standard for the iR2030/iR2025) is installed.
*5 The Duplex Unit-B1 is not required when making 2 to 1-Sided printing. 3
*6 The Department ID Management function is a standard function in this machine. If the optional Card Reader-E1 is attached, Department ID

Optional Equipment
Management is performed automatically, and you do not have to enter the Department ID and password manually. For the detailed
information on the Department ID Management, see “Department ID Management,” on p. 3-22.

System Configuration 3-7

 Cassette Feeding Module-P1/Q1

If you attach the Cassette Feeding Module-P1 (available only for the iR2018i), you have one
additional paper source for print jobs. If you attach the Cassette Feeding Module-Q1 to the
machine, you have two additional paper sources for print jobs. Each cassette holds up to 250
sheets (80 g/m2) of A3, A4, A4R, or A5 paper.

3 Parts and Their Functions

Optional Equipment

Cassette Feeding Module-P1 Cassette Feeding Module-Q1

a Paper Drawers b Paper Drawer’s Left Cover

Each paper drawer holds up to 250 sheets of paper Open this cover to remove jammed paper.
(80 g/m2).

3-8 Cassette Feeding Module-P1/Q1

Optional Accessory
■ FL Cassette-AF1
This cassette can be adjusted to hold various paper sizes. (See “Adjusting a Paper Drawer to Hold a
Different Paper Size,” on p. 7-8.)

• Available Locations: Paper Drawers 1, 2, 3, or 4

• Available Paper Sizes: A3, A4, A4R, or A5

Optional Equipment

Cassette Feeding Module-P1/Q1 3-9

 Feeder (DADF-P2)

Originals placed in the feeder are automatically fed sheet by sheet to the scanning area. The
feeder also automatically turns over two-sided originals to make one- or two-sided copies.

CAUTION
• Do not insert your finger into the gaps around the original supply tray, as your fingers may
get caught. Also, be careful not to drop objects, such as paper clips into the gaps, as doing
3 so may cause damage to the machine or cause it to break down.
• When using the platen glass to copy or scan thick originals, such as books or magazines, do
Optional Equipment

not press down hard on the feeder.

• If the original output area is blocked, originals may get damaged, and printing may not be
performed correctly. Therefore, do not place any objects in the original output area.

NOTE
The feeder (DADF-P2) is standard for the iR2022i/iR2018i.

Parts and Their Functions

a b c

a Feeder Cover c Original Supply Tray

Open this cover to remove jammed originals. Originals placed here are automatically fed sheet by sheet
to the scanning area of the platen glass. Place originals into
b Slide Guides
this tray with the surface that you want to scan face up.
Adjust the slide guide to match the width of the original.
d Original Output Area
Originals that have been scanned from the original supply
tray are output to the original output area in the order that
they are fed into the feeder.

3-10 Feeder (DADF-P2)

Platen Cover Type J

The Platen Cover Type J secures originals that are placed on the platen glass for copying.

Parts and Their Functions

Optional Equipment
a Platen Cover
Close the platen cover to secure originals that have been
placed on the platen glass.

Platen Cover Type J 3-11

 Finisher-U2

The Finisher-U2 is equipped with the following finishing modes: Collate, Group, Offset, and
Staple. (See “Finishing Modes,” on p. 3-13.)
If the optional Additional Finisher Tray-C1 is attached to the Finisher-U2, prints can be delivered
to two different locations.

IMPORTANT
3
The Finisher-U2 cannot be attached with the optional Inner 2 Way Tray-E2.
Optional Equipment

Parts and Their Functions

a Front Cover of the Finisher b Additional Finisher Tray-C1

Open this cover to replace the staple cartridge in the The Additional Finisher Tray-C1 can be attached to the
stapler unit, or to clear a staple jam. For instructions on optional Finisher-U2, and provides an additional paper
replacing the staple cartridge, see “Replacing the Staple output tray.
Cartridge,” on p. 7-17. For instructions on clearing a staple
c Auxiliary Tray
jam, see “Clearing Staple Jams,” on p. 8-41.
If you are printing on large size paper, such as A3, pull out
the auxiliary tray.
d Output Tray
Paper is output to this tray.

3-12 Finisher-U2
Finishing Modes
The Finisher-U2 is equipped with the following finishing modes.

NOTE
If the Collate or Group mode is set, the output trays move downward as the stack of paper that is output
increases in quantity and thickness. Once the output trays have reached their stacking limit, printing
stops temporarily. Remove all of the prints from the output trays, and printing resumes.

■ Collate Mode
The prints are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order. The sets of collated prints can be
shifted by pressing [Offset].

■ Group Mode
3
All prints of the same original page are grouped together. The sets of grouped prints can be shifted by

Optional Equipment
pressing [Offset].

■ Offset Mode
The print output is shifted alternately to the front and back of the tray, in a vertical (portrait) orientation, or
a horizontal (landscape) orientation depending on the orientation of your originals. For example, if you
place A4R originals, the paper is output and shifted in the horizontal direction. If you place A4 originals,
the paper is output and shifted in the vertical direction.

Finisher-U2 3-13
 ■ Staple Mode
The prints are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order and stapled. Prints are stapled in
the following places:

• When an original is placed on the platen glass:

Copies are stapled here. Copies are stapled here.

3
Optional Equipment

Vertical Placement Horizontal Placement

• When originals are placed in the feeder:

Copies are stapled here. Copies are stapled here.

ABC
ABC

Vertical Placement Horizontal Placement

3-14 Finisher-U2
CAUTION
• Do not place your hand in the roller or the part of the tray where stapling is performed if the
finisher is attached, as this may result in personal injury.

3
• Do not place anything other than output paper in the trays of the finisher, as doing so may

Optional Equipment
damage the trays.
• Do not place anything under the trays of the finisher, as doing so may damage the trays.

Finisher-U2 3-15
 IMPORTANT
• If the Staple mode is set, the output trays move downward as the stack of paper that is output increases
in quantity and thickness. Once an output tray has reached its stacking limit, printing and stapling stop
temporarily. Remove all of the stapled prints from the output trays, and printing and stapling resume.
• Only the following paper sizes can be stapled: A3, A4, or A4R
• You cannot staple envelopes, transparencies, or labels.
• Do not pull copies or prints out of the output area while they are being stapled. Remove the copies or
prints after they are output to one of the output trays.

NOTE
• The maximum number of sheets, including cover sheets, that can be stapled together is as follows (only
64 to 80 g/m2 paper can be used for the main document, and 64 to 128 g/m2 paper can be used for the
cover page):
3 - A4
50 sheets (64 to 80 g/m2)
Optional Equipment

- A3, A4R
30 sheets (64 to 80 g/m2)
• If the machine stops while stapling and the message <Load staples.> appears, almost all of the staples
have been used, and the staple cartridge must be replaced. To proceed, replace the staple cartridge.
(See “Replacing the Staple Cartridge,” on p. 7-17.)

3-16 Finisher-U2
Inner 2 Way Tray-E2

If you attach the Inner 2 Way Tray-E2 to the machine, prints can be delivered to both the main
tray and the Inner 2 Way Tray-E2.
When the Inner 2 Way Tray-E2 is attached to the machine, the following finishing modes are
available:

IMPORTANT
3
If the optional Finisher-U2 is attached, the Inner 2 Way Tray-E2 cannot be attached.

Optional Equipment
■ Collate Mode
The prints are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order before they are delivered to the
Inner 2 Way Tray-E2.

■ Group Mode
All prints of the same original page are grouped together into sets before they are delivered to the Inner
2 Way Tray-E2.

■ Rotate Mode
If originals of the same size are printed, the prints are automatically collated into sets arranged in page
order and are output in alternating directions.

NOTE
For details on the Finishing mode, see Chapter 2, “Basic Copying Features,” in the Copying Guide.

Inner 2 Way Tray-E2 3-17

 Parts and Their Functions

3
Optional Equipment

a Inner 2 Way Tray-E2 (Tray B) b Main output Tray (Tray A)

Prints are output to this tray. Prints are output to this tray.

3-18 Inner 2 Way Tray-E2

Card Reader-E1

If the Card Reader-E1 is attached to the machine, you must insert a control card to operate it.
The Card Reader-E1 performs Department ID Management automatically.

IMPORTANT
If User ID Management is set to ‘On’, enter your card number in the card ID field. See the Remote UI
Guide for details.
3
NOTE

Optional Equipment
• If the Basic Features screen does not appear on the touch panel display when the control card is
inserted, make sure that:
- The control card is inserted in the correct direction.
- The control card is inserted as far as it can go.
- An unusable control card is not inserted. (For example, cards which are damaged or cards prohibited
from use.)
• Insert a usable control card correctly.
• For instructions on turning the power ON, see “Main Power and Control Panel Power,” on p. 1-16.
• If the Card Reader-E1 is attached, the type of card shown below can be used. A magnetic type card can
manage up to 1,000 departments.

Magnetic Type Card

CONTROL CARD

123

Card Reader-E1 3-19

 Procedure before Using the Machine

1 Insert the control card into the card slot, making sure that it is facing in
the correct direction.

3
Optional Equipment

The Basic Features screen of the selected function appears on the touch panel display.

3-20 Card Reader-E1

Procedure after Using the Machine

1 After you finish using the machine, remove the control card.

Optional Equipment
The touch panel display returns to the screen for inserting the control card.

IMPORTANT
• Once you have removed the control card, you cannot operate the machine until the control card
is inserted again.
• The control card must remain inserted until copying is complete.

Card Reader-E1 3-21

 Department ID Management
This section describes how to change the password and page limit, and how to check the print
totals when the control card is being used.

IMPORTANT
Do not change the password when using a control card. The control card will become unusable if the
password for the Department ID is changed.

NOTE
• You cannot store a password that only consists of zeros, such as <0000000>.
If you enter fewer than seven digits, the machine stores the password with leading zeros.
- Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.
3 • You can set the page limit from 0 to 999,999 pages.
Optional Equipment

Changing the Password and Page Limit

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) ➞ press (Log In/Out).

3-22 Card Reader-E1

2 Press [Department ID Management].

Optional Equipment
NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼ ] or [▲ ] to scroll to the desired setting.

3 Press [Register ID/Password].

Card Reader-E1 3-23

 4 Press [▼] or [▲] to display the Department ID whose password you
want to change ➞ select the Department ID ➞ press [Edit].

3
Optional Equipment

NOTE
Press and hold down [▼ ] or [▲ ] to quickly and continuously scroll through the available
Department ID pages. Continuous scrolling is useful when a large number of Department IDs are
registered.

3-24 Card Reader-E1

5 Enter the new password (up to seven digits) using
- (numeric keys).

Optional Equipment
You cannot store a password that only consists of zeros, such as <0000000>.
If you enter fewer than seven digits, the machine stores the password with leading zeros.
Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.

NOTE
• If you make a mistake when entering the password, press (Clear) to clear the password.
• You cannot change the Department ID.

Card Reader-E1 3-25

 6 If you want to change or set a page limit restriction, press [Turn Limits
On/Off and Set Page Limits].

3
Optional Equipment

7 Press [On] under the desired function(s).

If you do not want to set a page limit restriction for a function, press [Off] under the desired
function’s name.

NOTE
<Total Print Limit> is the sum of <Copy Limit> and <Print Limit>.

3-26 Card Reader-E1

8 Press [ ] (Page Limit) next to [On]/[Off] of the desired function(s) ➞
enter the page limit restriction using - (numeric keys).

Optional Equipment
IMPORTANT
• The machine stops sending a fax if the Scan Limit is reached while faxing a document either
from memory or directly to the recipient.
• The machine stops scanning if the Scan Limit is reached while the machine is scanning originals
that are being fed from the feeder. (Those originals that were scanned before the limit is reached
are not added to the scan count.)

NOTE
• If you make a mistake when entering a number, press (Clear) to clear the number.
• You can set the page limit from 0 to 999,999 pages. Once the page limit is reached, copying,
scanning, or printing cannot be done.
• The page limit refers to the number of printed surfaces. Therefore, a two-sided print is counted as
two pages.

Card Reader-E1 3-27

 9 Press [OK] ➞ [OK].

3
The page limits for the selected function(s) are set.
Optional Equipment

10 Press [Done].

3-28 Card Reader-E1

11 Press [OK].

Optional Equipment

Card Reader-E1 3-29

 12 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.

3
Copy Basic Features Screen
Optional Equipment

Send Basic Features Screen

Network Scan Screen

NOTE
The Send Basic Features screen varies depending on the installed options.

3-30 Card Reader-E1

Checking the Page Counts on a Control Card
You can check the page counts on the control card you are currently using.

1 Press [System Monitor].

Optional Equipment
2 Press [Pg Ct Chk].

Card Reader-E1 3-31

 3 Check the page counts ➞ press [Done] ➞ [Done].

3
The display returns to the Basic Features screen.
Optional Equipment

Checking and Printing Counter Information

You can display and print a list of how much paper was used by each department.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞

[Department ID Management].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of “Changing the Password and Page Limit,”
on p. 3-22.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) ➞ press (Log In/Out).

NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼ ] or [▲ ] to scroll to the desired setting.

3-32 Card Reader-E1

2 Press [Page Totals].

Optional Equipment
3 Check or print the page total count.
The print page totals that belong to print jobs without a Department ID (left blank) are the
number of prints from computers that do not correspond with a registered Department ID.
These prints are referred to as prints with unknown IDs.
The scan page totals that belong to scan jobs without a Department ID (left blank) are the
number of pages that have been scanned from computers that do not correspond with a
registered Department ID. The scanned pages from computers are referred to as network
scans with unknown IDs.

Card Reader-E1 3-33

 ● If you only want to check the counter information:
❑ Press [▼] or [▲] to display the desired Department ID ➞ press [ ] or [ ] to display and view
the desired page totals.

3
Optional Equipment

NOTE
Press and hold down [▼ ] or [▲ ] to quickly and continuously scroll through the available
Department ID pages. Continuous scrolling is useful when a large number of Department IDs are
registered.

3-34 Card Reader-E1

● If you want to print the displayed list:
❑ Press [Print List].
❑ Press [Yes].

Optional Equipment
If you do not want to print the displayed list, press [No].
Printing starts.
The screen below is displayed while the machine is printing the counter information.

NOTE
• To cancel printing, press [Cancel].
• To close the screen that is displayed while the machine is printing the Page Count List, press
[Done].
• The counter information can be printed only if A3, A4, or A4R (plain, recycled, or color paper) is
loaded in a paper source that is set to ‘On’ when you press [Other] to select a paper source in
Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
(See “Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer Switching,” on p. 4-27.)

Card Reader-E1 3-35

 4 Press [Done].

3
Optional Equipment

5 Press [OK].

3-36 Card Reader-E1

Clearing Page Totals
You can clear the page totals made for all departments or for specific departments.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞

[Department ID Management].
If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of “Changing the Password and Page Limit,”
on p. 3-22.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) ➞ press (Log In/Out).

NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼ ] or [▲ ] to scroll to the desired setting. 3

Optional Equipment
2 Press [Page Totals].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 2 of “Checking and Printing Counter Information,” on
p. 3-32.

3 Press [Clear All Totals].

To clear one page total at a time by Department ID, press [▼] or [▲] to display the desired
Department ID ➞ select the Department ID ➞ press [Clear].

Card Reader-E1 3-37

 4 Press [Yes].

3
If you do not want to clear the page totals, press [No].
Optional Equipment

The message <Erased.> appears for approximately two seconds on the touch panel display.

The page totals are cleared.

3-38 Card Reader-E1

5 Press [Done].

Optional Equipment
6 Press [OK].

Card Reader-E1 3-39

 Accepting Print and Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs
You can specify whether to accept or reject print and network scan jobs from computers that do
not correspond to any registered Department ID.

NOTE
The default setting is ‘On’ for both <Allow ID Unknown Printer Jobs> and <Allow ID Unknown Remote
Scan Jobs>.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞

[Department ID Management].
3 If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of “Changing the Password and Page Limit,”
on p. 3-22.
Optional Equipment

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) ➞ press (Log In/Out).

NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼ ] or [▲ ] to scroll to the desired setting.

2 Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

Allow ID Unknown Printer Jobs:
[On]: The machine accepts print jobs from computers that do not correspond with a
registered Department ID.

[Off]: The machine does not accept print jobs from computers that do not correspond with a
registered Department ID, and you must enter a Department ID and password to
operate the machine.

Allow ID Unknown Remote Scan Jobs:

[On]: The machine accepts remote scan jobs from computers that do not correspond with a
registered Department ID.

[Off]: The machine does not accept remote scan jobs from computers that do not
correspond with a registered Department ID.

3-40 Card Reader-E1

Customizing Settings
This chapter describes the default settings and procedures to change them according to your needs.
4
CHAPTER

What Are Additional Functions? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Accessing the Additional Functions Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Additional Functions Settings Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Specifying Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Initial Function at Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Default Display after Auto Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Tone Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Setting the Toner Save Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Printer Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Inch Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Output Tray Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Standard Paper for the Stack Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Paper Feed Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Changing the Language Shown on the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Reversing the Contrast of the Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Displaying a Feeder Error Message Prompt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Data Compression Ratio for Remote Scans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Setting the Gamma Value for Remote Scans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Returning the Common Settings to Their Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
Timer Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Current Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Auto Sleep Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Auto Clear Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
Cleaning and Adjusting the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
Improving Print Quality and Density (Special Mode M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
Preventing Paper Curls or Jams Due to High-humidity Environment (Special Mode N). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Preventing Paper Jams when Printing on the Back of a Printed Paper (Special Mode O) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Preventing Paper Curls Due to Paper Type (Special Mode P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
Setting the Bond Special Fixing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Cutting Down Waiting Time for a Next Job (Special Mode S). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
Adjusting Output Speed in the Rotate Collate Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
Feeder Smudge Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84

4-1
 What Are Additional Functions?

Additional Functions enable you to customize the machine’s various settings.

IMPORTANT
• If User ID Management is set to ‘On’, users whose user type is registered as “User” (end user) cannot
change the System Manager Settings even if there are no System Manager ID and System Password
set.
• If User ID Management is set to ‘On’, users whose user type is registered as “Administrator” can change
the System Manager Settings by entering the System Manager ID and System Password, or registering
the System Manager ID and System Password as their user information in advance.
4
NOTE
Customizing Settings

Settings specified from the Additional Functions screen are never changed when you press (Reset).

Accessing the Additional Functions Screen

1 Press (Additional Functions).

The Additional Functions screen is displayed.

2 Select an Additional Functions setting.

4-2 What Are Additional Functions?

3 Press a mode key to specify its settings.

For an overview of all the settings you can change from the Additional Functions screen, see
“Additional Functions Settings Table,” on p. 4-4.
4
NOTE

Customizing Settings
The Common Settings, Adjustment/Cleaning, and System Settings screens consist of a list of
individual settings. Press [▼ ] or [▲ ] to scroll to the desired setting.

What Are Additional Functions? 4-3

 Additional Functions Settings Table

The following settings can be selected or stored from the Additional Functions screen. For more
information, consult the following guides.

• Copy Settings: The Copying Guide

• Communications Settings, Address Book Settings, and The Sending and Facsimile Guide
Report Settings:
• Printer Settings and Report Settings: The PCL/UFR II Printer Guide or UFR II
Printer Guide
• Network Settings and Report Settings: The Network Guide
4
Customizing Settings

The Additional Functions Screen

4-4 Additional Functions Settings Table

The menus described in this section are based on the iR2022i. Depending on the model of your
machine, some settings may not be available.

■ Common Settings
Applicable
Item Settings
Page

Select Initial Function: Copy*1, Send, Scan

Initial Function Set System Monitor Screen as initial function: On, Off*1 p. 4-15

Set [Device] as the default for System Monitor: On*1, Off

Auto Clear Setting Initial Function*1, Selected Function p. 4-18

Entry Tone: On*1 (1* to 3 levels*2), Off

Error Tone: On*1 (1* to 3 levels*2), Off
Send Done Tone: On (1* to 3 levels*2), Off*1
Audible Tones p. 4-20
Receive Done Tone: On (1* to 3 levels*2), Off*1
Print Done Tone: On*1 (1* to 3 levels*2), Off
4
Scan Done Tone: On*1 (1* to 3 levels*2), Off

Customizing Settings
Toner Save Mode High, Low, Off*1 p. 4-22

Printer Density 1 to 9 Levels; 5*1 p. 4-23

Inch Entry On, Off*1 p. 4-25
Copy
Stack Bypass: On, Off*1
All Other Paper Sources: On*1, Off
Printer
Stack Bypass: cannot be set
Drawer Eligibility For APS/ All Other Paper Sources: On*1, Off
p. 4-27
ADS Receive
Stack Bypass: On, Off*1
All Other Paper Sources: On*1, Off
Other
Stack Bypass: On, Off*1
All Other Paper Sources: On*1, Off
Register Paper Type Plain*1, Recycled, Color, Bond, Heavy Paper 1 p. 4-30
Energy Consumption in
Low*1, High p. 4-33
Sleep Mode

*1 Indicates the default setting.

*2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.

Additional Functions Settings Table 4-5

 ■ Common Settings Table Continued
Applicable
Item Settings
Page
If the Optional Inner 2 Way Tray-E2 Is Attached
Tray A: Copy*1, Printer*1, Receive*1, Other*1

Tray B: Copy*1, Printer*1, Receive*1, Other*1

Tray Designation*2 If the Optional Finisher-U2 and Additional Finisher p. 4-35
Tray-C1 Are Attached
Tray A: Copy*1, Printer*1, Receive*1, Other*1

Tray B: Copy, Printer*1, Receive*1, Other*1

Stack Bypass Standard On: Paper Size, Paper Type
p. 4-38
Settings Off*1
4 Paper Feed Method Switch
Stack Bypass, Paper Drawer 1, Paper Drawer 2, Paper
p. 4-45
Drawer 3*2, Paper Drawer 4*2: Speed*1, Print Side
Customizing Settings

Language Switch On, Off*1 p. 4-47

Reversed Display (B/W) On, Off*1 p. 4-49
Error Display for Dirty
On*1, Off p. 4-51
Feeder
Data Compress. Ratio for
High Ratio, Normal*1, Low Ratio p. 4-53
Remote Scans
Gamma Value for Remote
Gamma 1.0, Gamma 1.4, Gamma 1.8*1, Gamma 2.2 p. 4-55
Scans
Initialize Common Settings Initialize p. 4-57

*1 Indicates the default setting.

*2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.

4-6 Additional Functions Settings Table

■ Timer Settings
Applicable
Item Settings
Page
Date and Time Setting (12 digit number)

Time Zone Settings:

Date & Time Settings GMT -12:00 to GMT +12:00; p. 4-59
GMT 00:00*1

Daylight Saving Time Settings: On*1, Off

On*1 3 to 30 minutes; 5*1
Auto Sleep Time p. 4-65
Off
Auto Clear Time 0 (Off) to 9 minutes, in one minute increments; 2 min.*1 p. 4-67

*1 Indicates the default setting.

4
■ Adjustment/Cleaning

Customizing Settings
Applicable
Item Settings
Page
Transfer Roller Cleaning Press [Start] p. 7-44
Drum Cleaning Press [Start] p. 7-46
Fixing Unit Cleaning Press [Cleaning Sheet Print] p. 7-48
Feeder Cleaning Press [Start] p. 7-54
Special Mode M Standard*1, Low, Moderate, High p. 4-70
Special Mode N Auto*1, Manual (Medium, High), Off p. 4-72

Stack Bypass: Medium, High, Off*1

Special Mode O p. 4-74
Drawer: Medium, High, Off*1
Special Mode P Off*1, Medium, High p. 4-76

Bond Special Fixing Mode On, Off*1 p. 4-78

Special Mode S Speed Priority 1, Speed Priority 2, Off*1 p. 4-80

Rotate Collate Adjustment Speed Priority 1*1, Speed Priority 2, Image Priority p. 4-82
Auto Adjustment for Dirty
On*1, Off p. 4-84
Feeder
Maintenance Code This setting is not functional in this model. -

*1 Indicates the default setting.

Additional Functions Settings Table 4-7

 ■ Report Settings
Applicable
Item Settings
Page
Settings TX Report: On, For Error Only*1, Off

Report With TX Image: On*1, Off

Activity Report

Auto Print: On*1, Off

Send/Receive Separate: On, Off*1
*3
RX Report: On, For Error Only, Off*1
Print List Address Book List
One-touch Buttons: Yes, No
Address Book: Yes, No
User’s Data List: Yes, No
4
*1 Indicates the default setting.
Customizing Settings

*3 See the Sending and Facsimile Guide.

4-8 Additional Functions Settings Table

■ System Settings
Applicable
Item Settings
Page
System Manager Settings
System Manager 32 characters maximum
p. 6-2
System Manager ID Seven digit number maximum
System Password Seven digit number maximum
Department ID Management
Department ID
On, Off*1
Management
Register ID/Password Register, Edit, Erase, Set page limits
Page Totals Clear, Clear All Totals, Print List p. 6-6

Allow ID
On*1, Off
4
Unknown Printer Jobs

Customizing Settings
Allow ID Unknown Remote
On*1, Off
Scan Jobs
Network Settings *4

*1 Indicates the default setting.

*4 See the Network Guide.

Additional Functions Settings Table 4-9

 ■ System Settings Table Continued
Applicable
Item Settings
Page
Forwarding Settings

Receive Type*2 All*1, Fax, I-Fax

Validate/Invalidate On, Off*1
Condition Name: 50 characters maximum

Register Forwarding Conditions

Receive Type: Fax*2, I-Fax

Receive Type: Fax*2, I-Fax

Forwarding Destination: Select from the registered *3

Forward w/o Cond.
addresses.
4
File Format: TIFF*1, PDF, Divide into Pages
Customizing Settings

Condition Name: 50 characters maximum

Detail/Edit Forwarding Conditions

Receive Type: Fax*2, I-Fax
Erase Yes, No
Print List Yes, No
Device Info Settings
Device Name 32 characters maximum p. 6-32
Location 32 characters maximum
User ID Management On, Off*1 p. 6-34

*1 Indicates the default setting.

*2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
*3 See the Sending and Facsimile Guide.

4-10 Additional Functions Settings Table

■ System Settings Table Continued
Applicable
Item Settings
Page
Communications Settings
Maximum TX Data Size: 0 to 99 MB, in one MB
increments, 3 MB*1
E-mail/I-Fax Settings
Divided TX over Max. Data Size: On, Off*1

Default Subject: 40 characters maximum

Send Start Speed: 33600 bps*1, 14400 bps, 9600 bps, *3
7200 bps, 4800 bps, 2400 bps

Fax Settings*2 Receive Start Speed: 33600 bps*1, 14400 bps, 9600 bps,
7200 bps, 4800 bps, 2400 bps

R-Key Settings: PSTN*1/PBX 4

Memory Lock Settings On, Off*1

Customizing Settings
Remote UI On/Off On*1, Off p. 6-36, *5
Address Book Password: 7 digits maximum

Restrict New Addresses: On, Off*1

Allow Fax Driver TX: On*1, Off

Restrict the Send
p. 6-38
Function Restrict Recall: On, Off*1

Confirm Entered Fax Numbers*2: On, Off*1

Restrict Sequential Broadcast: Broadcast Confirmation,

Prohibit Broadcast, Off*1
License Registration Enter a license key using the numeric keys. p. 1-24
Display Dept. ID/User
On*1, Off p. 6-54
Name

Auto Online: On, Off*1

Auto Online/Offline p. 6-59
Auto Offline: On, Off*1
Job Log Display On*1, Off p. 6-50

Use USB Device On*1, Off p. 6-52

Print Image:On*1, Off

Failed Forwarding
p. 6-56
Document Set.
Store Image to Memory:On, Off*1

PDL Selection (PnP)*2 UFRII LT*, PCL5e, PCL6, FAX p. 6-63

*1 Indicates the default setting.

*2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
*3 See the Sending and Facsimile Guide.
*5 See the Remote UI Guide.

Additional Functions Settings Table 4-11

 IMPORTANT
• If User ID Management is set to ‘On’, users whose user type is registered as “User” (end users) cannot
change the System Manager Settings even if there are no System Manager ID and System Password
set.
• If User ID Management is set to ‘On’, users whose user type is registered as “Administrator” can change
the System Manager Setting by entering the System Manager ID and System Password, or registering
the System Manager ID and System Password as their user information in advance.

■ Copy Settings
Applicable
Item Settings
Page
Image Orientation Priority On, Off*1
Auto Orientation On*1, Off
*6
Standard Settings Store, Initialize
4 Initialize Copy Settings Yes, No
Customizing Settings

*1 Indicates the default setting.

*6 See the Copying Guide.

■ Communications Settings
Applicable
Item Settings
Page
Common Settings
TX Settings Unit Name (24 characters maximum)

Data Compression Ratio: High Ratio, Normal*1, Low

Ratio

Retry Times: 0 to 5 times; 3 times*1

Edit Standard Send Settings
Store, Initialize
TX Terminal ID

On*1 (Printing Position: Inside, Outside*1; *3

Telephone # Mark: FAX*2, TEL) Off
Gamma Value for Color Send Jobs: Gamma 1.0, Gamma
1.4, Gamma 1.8*1, Gamma 2.2

Sharpness: 1 to 7 levels, 4*1

Register Favorites Button: M1 to M18

Color TX Scan Settings: Speed Priority*1, Image Priority

Default Screen for Send: Favorites Buttons, One-touch
Buttons, Initial Function*1
Initialize TX Settings: Yes, No

*1 Indicates the default setting.

*2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
*3 See the Sending and Facsimile Guide

4-12 Additional Functions Settings Table

■ Communications Settings Table Continued
Applicable
Item Settings
Page
RX Settings 2-Sided Print: On, Off*1
Select Cassette

Switch A: On*1, Off

Switch B: On*1, Off
Switch C: On*1, Off
Switch D: On*1, Off
Receive Reduction

On*1 RX Reduction: Auto*1, Fix. Red.

Reduce %: 97, 95, 90*1, 75%

Reduce Direction: Ver. Hor., Vertical Only*1

Off
4

Customizing Settings
Received Page Footer: On, Off*1

Continue Printing When Toner Is Out: On, Off*1

Fax Settings*2

User Settings*2 Unit Telephone # (20 characters maximum)

*3
Tel Line Type: Tone*1, Pulse
Monitor Volume Control

Volume Control: 0 to 3 levels, 1*1

TX Settings*2 ECM TX: On*1, Off

Pause Time: 1 to 15 seconds; 4 seconds*1

Auto Redial
On*1 Option:

Redial Times: 1 to 10 times; 2 times*1

Redial Interval: 2 to 99 minutes; 2 minutes*1

TX Error Redial: On*1, Off

Off

Check Dial Tone Before Sending: On*1, Off

Rotate Send: On*1, Off

RX Settings*2 ECM RX: On*1, Off

*1 Indicates the default setting.

*2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
*3 See the Sending and Facsimile Guide

■ Printer Settings
See the PCL/UFR II Printer Guide or UFR II Printer Guide.

Additional Functions Settings Table 4-13

 ■ Address Book Settings
Applicable
Item Settings
Page
Register Address
Register New Address

Fax*2 Fax Number: 120 characters maximum

Register Name: 16 characters maximum
Option: Sending Speed, Long Distance, ECM TX
E-mail E-mail Address: 120 characters maximum
Register Name: 16 characters maximum
I-Fax I-Fax Address: 120 characters maximum
Register Name: 16 characters maximum
4 File Protocol: FTP*1, Windows (SMB)
Customizing Settings

Host Name: 120 characters maximum

File Path: 120 characters maximum
User: 24 characters maximum *3

Password: 24 characters maximum (FTP), 14 characters

maximum (Windows (SMB))
Register Name: 16 characters maximum
Group Erase
Address Book
Register Name: 16 characters maximum
Erase
*3
Edit
One-touch Buttons
Register/Edit You can register or edit the items of One-touch Buttons
for Fax*2, E-mail, I-Fax, File, and Group shown in
Register New Add above.
Key Name: 12 characters maximum

*1 Indicates the default setting.

*2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
*3 See the Sending and Facsimile Guide.

4-14 Additional Functions Settings Table

Specifying Common Settings

You can specify the settings that are common to the Copy, Send/Fax, and Scan functions.

Initial Function at Power ON

You can specify the screen that is displayed when you turn ON the main power, or after the Auto
Clear mode initiates. The System Monitor screen can also be specified as the initial screen.

NOTE
• The default settings are: 4
- Select Initial Function: Copy

Customizing Settings
- Set System Monitor Screen as initial function: Off
- Set [Device] as the default for System Monitor: On

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings].

Specifying Common Settings 4-15

 2 Press [Initial Function].

NOTE
4 If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼ ] or [▲ ] to scroll to the desired setting.
Customizing Settings

3 Select [Copy], [Send], or [Scan] ➞ press [OK].

When the main power is turned ON or after the Auto Clear mode initiates:
If you select [Copy]: The Copy Basic Features screen appears.
If you select [Send]: The Send Basic Features screen appears.
If you select [Scan]: The Network Scan screen appears.

NOTE
• If only the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, [Fax] appears instead of [Send].
• If the optional Color Send Kit is not activated and the optional Super G3 FAX Board is not
installed for the iR2030/iR2025, [Send] or [Fax] does not appear.

4-16 Specifying Common Settings

 ● If you want to set the System Monitor screen as the initial function screen:
❑ Press [On] for <Set System Monitor Screen as initial function.> ➞ press [OK].

The System Monitor screen is displayed when the main power is turned ON, or after the
Auto Clear mode initiates.
4
The selected mode is set.

Customizing Settings
NOTE
If you do not want to set the Device Status screen as the default screen when you press [System
Monitor], press [Off] under <Set [Device] as the default for System Monitor>. If you select [Off],
the Copy Job Status screen is displayed by default when you press [System Monitor].

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.

Specifying Common Settings 4-17

 Default Display after Auto Clear
You can specify either the Initial Function or the Selected Function to be displayed on the
screen after the Auto Clear mode initiates.

NOTE
• The time necessary for Auto Clear to initiate can be set. (See “Auto Clear Time,” on p. 4-67.)
• The default setting is ‘Initial Function’.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞ [Auto Clear

Setting].

4
Customizing Settings

NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼ ] or [▲ ] to scroll to the desired setting.

4-18 Specifying Common Settings

2 Select [Initial Function] or [Selected Function] ➞ press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Initial Function]: The screen specified as the initial function is displayed after the
Auto Clear mode initiates. For example, if you set the System
4
Monitor screen as the initial screen, and Auto Clear initiates while a

Customizing Settings
settings screen for the Send function is shown, the display returns
to the System Monitor screen.
[Selected Function]: The display returns to the main screen of the function that was
displayed before the Auto Clear mode activated. For example, if you
set the System Monitor screen as the initial screen, and Auto Clear
initiates while a settings screen for the Send function is shown, the
display returns to the Send Basic Features screen.

The selected mode is set.

3 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.

Specifying Common Settings 4-19

 Tone Settings
You can set whether to sound audible tones. The following tones sound at the following times:
• Entry Tone: When pressing keys on the control panel or keys on the touch panel
display
• Error Tone: When a malfunction occurs (e.g., paper jam or operational error)
• Send Done Tone: When the fax transmission has finished
• Receive Done Tone: When the fax reception has finished
• Print Done Tone: When the printing has finished
• Scan Done Tone: When the scanning has finished

NOTE
• The default setting is ‘On’ for Entry Tone, Error Tone, Print Done Tone, and Scan Done Tone, and ‘Off’
4 for Send Done Tone and Receive Done Tone.
• The volume can be set only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed.
Customizing Settings

• Send Done Tone and Receive Done Tone do not appear if the optional Color Send Kit is not activated
and the optional Super G3 FAX Board is not installed for the iR2030/iR2025.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞ [Audible

Tones].

NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼ ] or [▲ ] to scroll to the desired setting.

4-20 Specifying Common Settings

2 Select the desired tones.

3 Select [On] ➞ press or to set the desired volume ➞ press [OK]. 4

Customizing Settings
If you select [Off], the selected tone is not sounded.
The selected mode is set.

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.

Specifying Common Settings 4-21

 Setting the Toner Save Mode
You can select the toner consumption for printing.

NOTE
• If the Toner Save mode is set to ‘High’, print quality may be affected. If you notice degradation in print
quality, set this mode to ‘Off’.
• The default setting is ‘Off’.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings] ➞ [Toner Save

Mode].

4
Customizing Settings

NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲ ] to scroll to the desired setting.

4-22 Specifying Common Settings

 2 Select [High], [Low], or [Off] ➞ press [OK].

3 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears. 4

Customizing Settings
Printer Density
You can set the density for printing.

NOTE
The default setting is ‘5’.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings].

If necessary, see the screen shots in step 1 of “Initial Function at Power ON,” on p. 4-15.

Specifying Common Settings 4-23

 2 Press [▼] or [▲] until [Printer Density] appears ➞ press [Printer
Density].

4
3 Press [Light] or [Dark] to set the desired Density ➞ press [OK].
Customizing Settings

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.

4-24 Specifying Common Settings

Inch Entry
Specifying this setting ensures that the key for entering values in inches is displayed on the
various numeric entry screens.
The default entry mode for numeric values is millimeters, but you can change it to inches by
turning the Inch Entry mode ‘On’.

NOTE
• Even if Inch Entry is set to ‘On’, you still have the option to enter measurements in millimeters by
pressing [mm] on the various numeric entry screens.
• The default setting is ‘Off’.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of “Initial Function at Power ON,” on p. 4-15. 4

Customizing Settings
2 Press [▼] or [▲] until [Inch Entry] appears ➞ press [Inch Entry].

Specifying Common Settings 4-25

 3 Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].

The selected mode is set.

4
4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.
Customizing Settings

4-26 Specifying Common Settings

Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer Switching
You can set which paper sources can be used for Automatic Paper Selection and Auto Drawer
Switching. This setting can be made independently for all the different functions of the machine,
and is especially useful when you want to use different paper sources for different purposes.

NOTE
• Paper sources set to ‘On’ are used for the following functions:
- APS (Auto Paper Selection): The machine automatically selects the appropriate paper size (paper
source) based on the original’s size and copy ratio settings (when making a copy), or the set ratio of
the image (when receiving a fax).
- ADS (Auto Drawer Switching): If a paper source runs out of paper during a continuous print job, the
machine automatically selects another paper source with the same paper size, and begins feeding
paper from that paper source.
• The default settings of Copy, Receive (Fax) and Other are ‘Off’ for the stack bypass, and ‘On’ for the
other paper sources.
• The default settings of Printer are “On” for all paper sources except for the stack bypass. You cannot set 4
the stack bypass for Printer.
• When you set ‘Off’ for the stack bypass and no optional cassette feeding module attached, Auto Drawer

Customizing Settings
Switching cannot be used for the iR2018i.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of “Initial Function at Power ON,” on p. 4-15.

2 Press [▼] or [▲] until [Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS] appears ➞

press [Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS].

Specifying Common Settings 4-27

 3 Select [Copy], [Printer], [Receive], or [Other].

NOTE
4 • If only the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, [Fax] appears instead of [Receive].
• If the optional Color Send Kit is not activated and the optional Super G3 FAX Board is not
Customizing Settings

installed for the iR2030/iR2025, [Receive] or [Fax] does not appear.

4 Select [On] or [Off] for the stack bypass and the other paper sources ➞
press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: Makes the paper source eligible for APS/ADS.
[Off]: Makes the paper source ineligible for APS/ADS.

4-28 Specifying Common Settings

 The numbers on the screen represent the following paper sources:

Stack Bypass
Paper Drawer 1
Paper Drawer 2 (optional for iR2018i)
Paper Drawer 3 (optional)
Paper Drawer 4 (optional)

The iR2022i with the optional Finisher-U2,

Additional Finisher Tray-C1 and
Cassette Feeding Module-Q1 attached

The selected mode is set. 4

Customizing Settings
NOTE
• Regardless of the stack bypass setting, you cannot select ‘Off’ for all of the paper sources at the
same time. At least one of the paper sources, besides the stack bypass must be set to ‘On’.
• If you selected [Printer] in step 3, the Stack Bypass icon ( ) will not be displayed on the paper
selection screen in step 4.

5 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.

Specifying Common Settings 4-29

 Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Source
This setting enables you to specify the paper type loaded in each paper source. Once you
specify this information, icons indicating the type of paper loaded in each paper source appear
on the paper selection screen.

IMPORTANT
Be sure to correctly set the paper type. If the type of paper is not set correctly, it could adversely affect
the quality of the image. Moreover, the fixing unit may become dirty and require a service repair, or the
paper could jam.

NOTE
For the iR2018i, (paper drawer 2) appears only if the optional Cassette Feeding Module-P1 is
attached. (paper drawer 3) and (paper drawer 4) appear only if the optional Cassette Feeding
Module-Q1 is attached to the iR2030/iR2025/iR2022i/iR2018i.

4
1
Customizing Settings

Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of “Initial Function at Power ON,” on p. 4-15.

2 Press [▼] or [▲] until [Register Paper Type] appears ➞ press [Register
Paper Type].

4-30 Specifying Common Settings

3 Select the paper source in which you want to register the paper type.

The numbers on the screen represent the following paper sources:

Customizing Settings
Paper Drawer 1
Paper Drawer 2 (optional for iR2018i)
Paper Drawer 3 (optional)
Paper Drawer 4 (optional)

The iR2022i with the optional Finisher-U2,

Additional Finisher Tray-C1 and
Cassette Feeding Module-Q1 attached

Specifying Common Settings 4-31

 4 Select the desired paper type loaded in the paper source ➞ press [OK].

Make sure that the registered paper type setting is the same paper type that is loaded in the
paper source.
4 The selected mode is set.
Customizing Settings

NOTE
For more information on paper types, see “Available Paper Stock,” on p. 2-56.

5 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.

NOTE
The registered paper type information is displayed through the use of icons on the paper
selection screen, as shown below.

4-32 Specifying Common Settings

Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode
You can set the amount of energy that the machine consumes when it is in the Sleep mode.

NOTE
• If there is a job which has been reserved for delayed sending, the machine will not enter the Sleep mode
completely.
• If you are using a management application to view or manage the settings and status of the machine via
the network, the machine may not enter the Sleep mode completely.
• If you are using the machine as a Windows printer, the machine may not enter the Sleep mode
completely if SNMP Status is enabled for your operating system (unless your computer is turned OFF).
For more information on disabling SNMP Status, contact your network administrator.
• The energy consumption level in the Sleep mode is ‘High’ even when the energy consumption level is
set to ‘Low’, such as when a job is being processed (including a forwarding job, report job, receive job,
or sending a forwarding done notice).
• The default setting is ‘Low’.
• For information on each setting, see the Sending and Facsimile Guide or Network Guide. 4

Customizing Settings
1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of “Initial Function at Power ON,” on p. 4-15.

2 Press [▼] or [▲] until [Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode] appears ➞

press [Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode].

Specifying Common Settings 4-33

 3 Select [Low] or [High] ➞ press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Low]: Energy consumption in the Sleep mode is low, but it takes longer to recover from
4 the Sleep mode.
Customizing Settings

[High]: Energy consumption in the Sleep mode is high, but it takes shorter to recover from
the Sleep mode.

The selected mode is set.

NOTE
If Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode is set to ‘Low’, it may take more than 10 seconds for the
touch panel to be displayed after pressing the control panel power switch.

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.

4-34 Specifying Common Settings

Output Tray Designation
You can designate the machine’s output trays to be used for specific functions.
[Tray Designation] appears only if the following options are attached. The output trays indicated
by Tray A and B differ according to the options attached to the machine.

Options Attached Default Settings Tray A/B

Tray A: Copy, Printer, Receive, Other

Inner 2 Way Tray-E2
Tray B: Copy, Printer, Receive, Other

Customizing Settings
Finisher-U2 and Additional Tray A: Copy, Printer, Receive, Other
Finisher Tray-C1 Tray B: Copy, Printer, Receive, Other

NOTE
• The same output tray can be designated for multiple functions.
• If only the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed, [Fax] appears instead of [Receive].
• If the optional Color Send Kit is not activated and the optional Super G3 FAX Board is not installed for
the iR2030/iR2025, [Receive] or [Fax] does not appear.

Specifying Common Settings 4-35

 1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of “Initial Function at Power ON,” on p. 4-15.

2 Press [▼] or [▲] until [Tray Designation] appears ➞ press [Tray

Designation].

4
Customizing Settings

3 Select the functions for which to designate output Trays A and B ➞

press [OK].

The iR2022i with the optional Inner 2 Way Tray-E2

and Cassette Feeding Module-Q1 attached

4-36 Specifying Common Settings

 The iR2022i with the optional Finisher-U2,
Additional Finisher Tray-C1 and
Cassette Feeding Module-Q1 attached
[Other] is used for specifying report printing settings.
If you want to use an output tray for only one function, select only that function.
4
The selected mode is set.

Customizing Settings
IMPORTANT
• If a certain tray reaches its stacking limit, the machine automatically uses another tray that is
designated for the same function. However, it is recommended that you only designate one tray
for fax documents to prevent them from getting lost.
• If the optional Finisher-U2 is attached and the Staple mode is set, the sheets are output to Tray
A, regardless of the Tray Designation settings.
• If the optional Finisher-U2 is attached and the following paper is selected, the sheets are output
to Tray A, regardless of the Tray Designation settings: nonstandard paper size stock, envelopes,
heavyweight paper, transparencies, or labels.

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.

Specifying Common Settings 4-37

 Standard Paper for the Stack Bypass
You can set the paper size and type that the stack bypass uses beforehand. This setting is
useful if you always load the same paper size and type into the stack bypass.
If the Stack Bypass Standard Settings are stored when using the Send function, you can also
use the stack bypass to receive I-fax or fax documents.

IMPORTANT
When printing on special types of paper, such as heavyweight paper or transparencies, be sure to
correctly set the paper type, especially if you are using heavyweight paper. If the type of paper is not set
correctly, it could adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the fixing unit may become dirty
and require a service repair, or the paper could jam.

NOTE
• If you are using the stack bypass as a paper source for Copy and Receive (I-fax or fax), you must select
the stack bypass when specifying the Drawer Eligibility for APS/ADS setting. (See “Auto Paper
4 Selection/Auto Drawer Switching,” on p. 4-27.)
• The default setting is ‘Off’.
Customizing Settings

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of “Initial Function at Power ON,” on p. 4-15.

2 Press [▼] or [▲] until [Stack Bypass Standard Settings] appears ➞

press [Stack Bypass Standard Settings].

4-38 Specifying Common Settings

3 Press [On] ➞ [Store].

If you press [Off], proceed to step 6.

4
4 Select the desired paper size.

Customizing Settings
● If you want to select a standard paper size:
❑ Select the desired paper size ➞ press [Next].

NOTE
To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].

Specifying Common Settings 4-39

 ❑ Select the desired paper type ➞ press [OK].

IMPORTANT
When printing on special types of paper, such as heavyweight paper or transparencies, be sure
4 to correctly set the paper type, especially if you are using heavyweight paper. If the type of paper
is not set correctly, it could adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the fixing unit may
Customizing Settings

become dirty and require a service repair, or the paper could jam.

NOTE
• If you select [Transparency] or [Labels], you cannot use the Rotate Collate, Rotate Group, Offset
Collate, Offset Group, or Staple mode.
• [Transparency] can be selected only if [A4] is selected as the paper size.
• For more information on paper types, see “Available Paper Stock,” on p. 2-56.

4-40 Specifying Common Settings

● If you want to select a nonstandard paper size:
❑ Press [Irreg. Size].

❑ Press [X] to specify the horizontal axis of the paper ➞ enter a value using
- (numeric keys).
❑ Press [Y] to specify the vertical axis of the paper ➞ enter a value using
4
- (numeric keys).

Customizing Settings
❑ Press [OK].

The display returns to the paper size selection screen.

Specifying Common Settings 4-41

 NOTE
• If you make a mistake when entering values, press [C] on the touch panel display ➞ enter the
correct values.
• To enter values in inches, press [Inch]. (See “Values in Inches,” on p. 2-24.)
• When entering the value in millimeters, you can also use - (numeric keys), and (Clear)
to clear your entry.
• You can change the value by pressing [-] or [+] in increments of 1.0 mm, even if you have entered
the value.
• If you enter a value outside the setting range, [OK] is grayed out and cannot be selected. Enter
an appropriate value.
• You can use values for [X] between 148 mm and 432 mm, and for [Y] between 95 mm and 297
mm.
❑ Press [Next]
❑ Select the desired paper type ➞ press [OK].

4
Customizing Settings

IMPORTANT
• When printing on special types of paper, such as heavyweight paper, be sure to correctly set the
paper type, especially if you are using heavyweight paper. If the type of paper is not set correctly,
it could adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the fixing unit may become dirty and
require a service repair, or the paper could jam.
• If you select [Irreg. Size], you cannot use the Rotate Collate, Rotate Group, Offset Collate, Offset
Group, Staple, 1 2-Sided, 2 2-Sided, Book 2-Sided, 2-Page Separation, or Image
Combination mode.

NOTE
• For more information on paper types, see “Available Paper Stock,” on p. 2-56.

4-42 Specifying Common Settings

● If you want to select an envelope size:
❑ Press [Envelope].

❑ Select the envelope type ➞ press [OK].

4

Customizing Settings
The display returns to the paper size selection screen.

IMPORTANT
• If the envelope type is not selected correctly, a paper jam may occur.
• If you select [Envelope], you cannot use the finishing modes, 1 2-Sided, 2 2-Sided, Book
2-Sided, 2-Page Separation, or Image Combination mode.
❑ Press [OK].

Specifying Common Settings 4-43

 5 Press [OK].

The selected mode is set.

4
6 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.
Customizing Settings

4-44 Specifying Common Settings

Paper Feed Method
You can set whether the printing speed is the priority for your job, or whether to print on a
specific side of the paper. This is useful when you want to make one- or two-sided prints on
preprinted paper (paper which has logos or patterns already printed on it) without changing the
orientation of the paper loaded in the paper source. [Print Side] is available only when the
optional Duplex Unit-B1 (standard for the iR2030/iR2025) is attached.

NOTE
The default setting for all the paper sources is ‘Speed’.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings].

If necessary, see the screen shots in step 1 of “Initial Function at Power ON,” on p. 4-15.
4
2 Press [▼] or [▲] until [Paper Feed Method Switch] appears ➞ press

Customizing Settings
[Paper Feed Method Switch].

Specifying Common Settings 4-45

 3 Select [Speed] or [Print Side] for each paper source ➞ press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Speed]: When you feed one- or two-sided prints into the machine, the method for
4 delivering paper inside the machine changes, and this affects the printing
speed. Therefore, to maximize the printing speed, load the paper manually as
Customizing Settings

follows:
One-Sided Prints: Load the paper face up in a paper drawer, or face down into the
stack bypass. The side facing up in the paper drawer, and the side
facing down in the stack bypass are the sides printed on.
Two-Sided Prints: Load the paper face down in a paper drawer, or face up in the stack
bypass. The side facing down in the paper drawer, and the side
facing up in the stack bypass are the first sides that are printed on.
[Print Side]: If you load paper in a paper drawer and select [Print Side], no matter whether
you are printing one- or two-sided prints, the side of the paper facing down is
always the one printed on first. (The side facing up is the one printed on first
for the stack bypass.) However, some speed will be sacrificed when printing
one-sided prints.
If [Print Side] is selected for a paper source, and Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common
Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to ‘On’, the Automatic Paper Selection
and Automatic Drawer Switching settings are ignored. Also, the machine’s printing speed may
become slower when you print one-sided documents.
The selected mode is set.

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.

4-46 Specifying Common Settings

Changing the Language Shown on the Touch Panel
Display
You can select the language displayed on the touch panel display.

NOTE
• If Language Switch is set to ‘On’, some characters are restricted and cannot be entered. To be able to
enter all characters, set Language Switch to ‘Off’.
• Even if Language Switch is set to ‘On’, there are some languages that cannot be displayed.
• The default setting is ‘Off’.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of “Initial Function at Power ON,” on p. 4-15.
4
2

Customizing Settings
Press [▼] or [▲] until [Language Switch] appears ➞ press [Language
Switch].

Specifying Common Settings 4-47

 3 Press [On] ➞ select the desired language ➞ press [OK].

If the desired language is not displayed, press [▼] or [▲].

If you do not want to change the display language, press [Off].
4 The touch panel display language changes to the selected language.
Customizing Settings

IMPORTANT
Some messages may not be displayed properly in the language that you just selected. If this
happens, restart the machine (turn the machine OFF, then back ON).

4-48 Specifying Common Settings

Reversing the Contrast of the Touch Panel Display
You can reverse the contrast on the touch panel display for better viewing. The Reversed
Display mode reverses the light and dark areas on the touch panel display. If you find it hard to
read what is being shown on the touch panel display, try using this mode.

NOTE
The default setting is ‘Off’.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of “Initial Function at Power ON,” on p. 4-15.

2 Press [▼] or [▲] until [Reversed Display (B/W)] appears ➞ press 4

[Reversed Display (B/W)].

Customizing Settings

Specifying Common Settings 4-49

 3 Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: The colors of the touch panel display screen are reversed (i.e., the areas that are
4 normally light become dark, and the dark areas become light).
Customizing Settings

[Off]: The touch panel display screen returns to its default colors.

The touch panel display’s contrast changes.

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.

4-50 Specifying Common Settings

Displaying a Feeder Error Message Prompt
You can use the Feeder Error Message Mode to prompt you to clean the scanning area when
the machine detects streaks or stains. If the feeder is not clean, the machine will scan and print
dust and grime on the output.
The Feeder Error Message Prompt appears only when originals are placed in the feeder. For
instructions on cleaning the feeder’s scanning area, see “Manual Feeder Cleaning,” on p. 7-37.

NOTE
• This mode is available only if the feeder (DADF-P2) is attached to the machine.
• The default setting is ‘On’.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of “Initial Function at Power ON,” on p. 4-15. 4

Customizing Settings
2 Press [▼] or [▲] until [Error Display for Dirty Feeder] appears ➞ press
[Error Display for Dirty Feeder].

Specifying Common Settings 4-51

 3 Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].

4 4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.

Customizing Settings

4-52 Specifying Common Settings

Data Compression Ratio for Remote Scans
You can set the compression ratio for network scanning. A high compression ratio reduces the
amount of memory used for scanning the document, but results in a lower image quality. On the
contrary, a low compression ratio increases the amount of memory used for scanning the
document, but results in a higher image quality.

NOTE
• For more information on the Network Scan function, see the Color Network ScanGear User’s Guide.
• The default setting is ‘Normal’.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of “Initial Function at Power ON,” on p. 4-15.
4
2

Customizing Settings
Press [▼] or [▲] until [Data Compress. Ratio for Remote Scans]
appears ➞ press [Data Compress. Ratio for Remote Scans].

Specifying Common Settings 4-53

 3 Select [High Ratio], [Normal], or [Low Ratio] ➞ press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[High Ratio]: A small amount of memory is used for scanning the document, but
4 the images have a lower image quality.
Customizing Settings

[Normal]: The amount of memory used for the document and the quality of
the images are moderate. The compression ratio is between the
High Ratio and Low Ratio settings.

[Low Ratio]: A large amount of memory is used for the document, but the
images have a higher image quality.

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.

4-54 Specifying Common Settings

Setting the Gamma Value for Remote Scans
You can set the gamma value that is used for scanning color documents into your computer
through the Network Scan function. Select a gamma value that is most suited to your computer
settings so that you can print the document from your computer with the most optimal density.

NOTE
• For more information on the Network Scan function, see the Color Network ScanGear User’s Guide.
• The default setting is ‘Gamma 1.8’.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of “Initial Function at Power ON,” on p. 4-15.

4
2 Press [▼] or [▲] until [Gamma Value for Remote Scans] appears ➞

Customizing Settings
press [Gamma Value for Remote Scans].

Specifying Common Settings 4-55

 3 Select the gamma value ([Gamma 1.0], [Gamma 1.4], [Gamma
1.8], or [Gamma 2.2]) ➞ press [OK].

4
4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.
Customizing Settings

4-56 Specifying Common Settings

Returning the Common Settings to Their Defaults
You can restore all of the Common Settings to their defaults (initial settings).

NOTE
If you set Language Switch to ‘On’, and then return the Common Settings to their default settings,
Language Switch is turned ‘Off’, but the language shown on the touch panel display remains
unchanged. (See “Changing the Language Shown on the Touch Panel Display,” on p. 4-47.)

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Common Settings].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of “Initial Function at Power ON,” on p. 4-15.

2 Press [▼] or [▲] until [Initialize Common Settings] appears ➞ press 4

[Initialize Common Settings].

Customizing Settings

Specifying Common Settings 4-57

 3 Press [Yes].

To cancel initializing the Common Settings, press [No].

The message <Initialized.> appears for approximately two seconds on the touch panel display.
4
Customizing Settings

The Common Settings are returned to their defaults.

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.

4-58 Specifying Common Settings

Timer Settings

You can make various timer related settings for the machine, such as adjusting the current time
and date, and specifying the time it takes for the machine to enter into the Sleep mode.

Current Date and Time

You can set the current date and time. The current date and time settings are used as standard
timer settings for functions that require them.

• GMT: The time at the Greenwich Observatory in England is called GMT

(Greenwich Mean Time).
4

Customizing Settings
• Time Zone: The standard time zones of the world are expressed globally in terms of
the difference in hours (± up to 12 hours) from GMT (±0 hours). A time
zone is a region throughout which this time difference is the same.

• Daylight Saving Time: In some countries, time is advanced throughout the summer season.
The period in which this is applied is called “Daylight Saving Time.”

Timer Settings 4-59

 1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Timer Settings].

4
2 Press [Date & Time Settings].
Customizing Settings

4-60 Timer Settings

3 Enter the current date (day, month, year) and time using
- (numeric keys).

Enter the day and the month using four digits (including zeros).
Enter all four digits of the year, and the time in 24-hour notation, as four digits (including zeros) 4
without a space.

Customizing Settings
Examples: May 6 ➞ 0605
7:05 a.m. ➞ 0705
11:18 p.m. ➞ 2318

NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering values, press (Clear) ➞ enter the values again, starting
with the day.

Timer Settings 4-61

 ● If you are setting the Time Zone:
❑ Press [Time Zone Settings] ➞ select the time zone in which the machine is located ➞ press
[OK].

4 NOTE
• The default setting is ‘GMT 0:00’.
Customizing Settings

• If the desired time zone is not displayed, press [▼ ] or [▲ ] to scroll through the list.

● If you are setting Daylight Saving Time:

❑ Press [Daylight Saving Time Settings] ➞ [On] ➞ [Start Date].

4-62 Timer Settings

❑ Select the month and day from the Month and Day drop-down lists, respectively ➞
press [OK].

❑ Press [End Date] ➞ select the month, and day, for which Daylight Saving Time ends ➞ press
[OK].
4

Customizing Settings
❑ Press [OK].

NOTE
• If you set Daylight Saving Time, the machine automatically sets the standard time of the machine
one hour forward at the specified date and time.
• The default setting is ‘On’.

Timer Settings 4-63

 4 Press [OK].

The selected mode is set.

4
5 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.
Customizing Settings

4-64 Timer Settings

Auto Sleep Time
If the machine is idle for a certain period of time (after the last print job or key operation is
performed), the control panel power switch automatically switches OFF to save power. The
machine has entered the Sleep mode.

NOTE
The default setting is ‘5’ minutes.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Timer Settings] ➞ [Auto Sleep

Time].

Customizing Settings

Timer Settings 4-65

 2 Press [On] ➞ press [-] or [+] to specify the desired Auto Sleep Time ➞
press [OK].

The Auto Sleep Time can be set from 3 to 30 minutes.

4 The selected mode is set.
Customizing Settings

3 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.

4-66 Timer Settings

Auto Clear Time
If the machine is idle for a certain period of time (after the last print job or key operation is
performed), the display returns to the Basic Features screen (standard settings) of the selected
function. This period of time is called the “Auto Clear Time.”
The Auto Clear Time mode can be set from 0 to 9 minutes in one minute increments, and can
also be set to ‘Off’.

NOTE
• If ‘0’ is selected, the Auto Clear Time mode is not set.
• The default setting is ‘2’ minutes.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Timer Settings] ➞

[Auto Clear Time]. 4

Customizing Settings

Timer Settings 4-67

 2 Press [-] or [+] to specify the desired Auto Clear Time ➞ press [OK].

The Auto Clear Time can be set from 0 to 9 minutes (in one minute increments).
You can also enter values using - (numeric keys).
4
The selected mode is set.
Customizing Settings

3 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.

4-68 Timer Settings

Cleaning and Adjusting the Machine

This section describes the introductions of routine cleaning and the settings to improve the print
quality and to prevent paper jams which may occur when a variety of functions are used.
Use of these settings will help you to clean the machine or to prevent a number of problems
from occurring.

Cleaning
Routine cleaning is needed for the long use of the machine. For more information on the routine
cleaning, see “Routine Cleaning,” on p. 7-35. You can clean the machine by the following 4
settings:

Customizing Settings
■ Transfer Roller Cleaning
Clean the transcription roller in the main unit when the backside of paper is smudged with printing. See
“Transfer Roller Cleaning,” on p. 7-44.

■ Drum Cleaning
Clean the drum in the main unit when print quality deteriorates. See “Drum Cleaning,” on p. 7-46.

■ Fixing Unit Cleaning

Clean the fixing unit in the main unit when black streaks appear with printing or you replace the toner
cartridges. See “Fixing Unit Cleaning,” on p. 7-48.

■ Feeder Cleaning
Clean the roller of the feeder when your originals have black streaks or appear dirty after scanning them.
See “Automatic Feeder Cleaning,” on p. 7-54.

Cleaning and Adjusting the Machine 4-69

 Improving Print Quality and Density (Special Mode M)
If print quality deteriorates or an irregularity of the print density appears, the transcription output
may not work adequately. Use Special Mode M to improve the print quality or irregular print
density.

NOTE
• The default setting is “Standard”.
• Selecting [High] may be effective when printing on the heavyweight paper.
• Selecting [Low] may be effective when printing on paper that contains a lot of moisture because it was
stored for a long period of time after opening, or when printing on recycled paper.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Adjustment/Cleaning].

4
Customizing Settings

2 Press [▼] or [▲] until [Special Mode M] appears ➞

press [Special Mode M].

4-70 Cleaning and Adjusting the Machine

3 Select [Standard], [Low], [Moderate], or [High] ➞ press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below:

[Standard]: Normal transcription output 4

[Low]: Lower than normal transcription output

Customizing Settings
[Moderate] Slightly higher than normal transcription output
[High]: Higher than normal transcription output

The selected mode is set.

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.

Cleaning and Adjusting the Machine 4-71

 Preventing Paper Curls or Jams Due to High-humidity
Environment (Special Mode N)
When printing on paper that has absorbed moisture, the paper may curl or jam. If the machine
is used in a high-humidity environment, use Special Mode N to prevent paper from curling or
jamming.

IMPORTANT
Do not use paper that has been exposed to high temperature or humidity for an extended period of time.
Printing on such paper will frequently result in a paper jam.

NOTE
• Printing times with Special Mode N activated are longer than when the function is not used.
• The default setting is ‘Auto’.

4
1 (Additional Functions) ➞ [Adjustment/Cleaning].
Customizing Settings

Press
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of “Improving Print Quality and Density (Special
Mode M),” on p. 4-70.

2 Press [▼] or [▲] until [Special Mode N] appears ➞

press [Special Mode N].

4-72 Cleaning and Adjusting the Machine

3 Select [Auto], [Manual], or [Off] ➞ press [OK].

Customizing Settings
Details of each item are shown below:
[Auto]: Automatically switches to the appropriate curl prevention level.
[Manual]: Enables manual selection of Medium or High.
[Medium]: Prevents curling of paper that has absorbed moisture.
[High]: Prevents paper curls more effectively than when Medium is selected.
[Off]: Disables Special Mode N.

The selected mode is set.

NOTE
If you select [Medium] or [High] when paper is not moistened, the print quality may be
deteriorated.

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.

Cleaning and Adjusting the Machine 4-73

 Preventing Paper Jams when Printing on the Back of a
Printed Paper (Special Mode O)
When printing on the back of a printed paper, paper jams may occur more frequently because
the paper does not separate easily from the drum. Use Special Mode O to prevent paper jams.

IMPORTANT
Do not use paper that has been exposed to high temperature or humidity for an extended period of time.
Printing on such paper will frequently result in a paper jam.

NOTE
The default settings are ‘Off’ for both Drawer and Stack Bypass.

4 1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Adjustment/Cleaning].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of “Improving Print Quality and Density (Special
Customizing Settings

Mode M),” on p. 4-70.

2 Press [▼] or [▲] until [Special Mode O] appears ➞

press [Special Mode O].

4-74 Cleaning and Adjusting the Machine

3 Select [Medium], [High], or [Off] for the desired paper source
➞ press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below:

[Medium]: Paper separates easily from the drum, preventing paper jams.
4

Customizing Settings
[High]: Prevents paper jams more effectively than when Medium is selected.
[Off]: Disables Special Mode O.

The selected mode is set.

NOTE
When you select [Medium] or [High], the image may become faint.

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.

Cleaning and Adjusting the Machine 4-75

 Preventing Paper Curls Due to Paper Type (Special Mode P)
This mode enables you to prevent curling when using paper such as lightweight paper or
recycled paper, which curls easily regardless of humidity.

NOTE
The default setting is ‘Off’.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Adjustment/Cleaning].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of “Improving Print Quality and Density (Special
Mode M),” on p. 4-70.

4 2 Press [▼] or [▲] until [Special Mode P] appears ➞

press [Special Mode P].
Customizing Settings

4-76 Cleaning and Adjusting the Machine

3 Select [Off], [Medium], or [High] ➞ press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below:

[Off]: Disables Special Mode P.
4
[Medium]: Prevents paper from curling.

Customizing Settings
[High]: Prevents paper curls more effectively than when Medium is selected.

The selected mode is set.

NOTE
If both of the Special Mode N and Special Mode P settings are enabled, Special Mode N will
prevail.

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.

Cleaning and Adjusting the Machine 4-77

 Setting the Bond Special Fixing Mode
You can specify to perform special fixing for bond paper.

NOTE
The default setting is ‘Off’.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Adjustment/Cleaning].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of “Improving Print Quality and Density (Special
Mode M),” on p. 4-70.

2 Press [▼] or [▲] until [Bond Special Fixing Mode] appears ➞ press
4 [Bond Special Fixing Mode].
Customizing Settings

4-78 Cleaning and Adjusting the Machine

3 Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].

The selected mode is set.

4
4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.

Customizing Settings

Cleaning and Adjusting the Machine 4-79

 Cutting Down Waiting Time for a Next Job
(Special Mode S)
If size of paper required is different for a job that follows an extended amount of printing, there
may be a waiting time before the next job starts. Use this feature to reduce the waiting time for
your next job.

NOTE
• The default setting is ‘OFF’.
• If you set this mode to ‘Speed Priority 1’ or ‘Speed Priority 2’, a previously printed image may reappear
faintly on the next output.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Adjustment/Cleaning].

4 If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of “Improving Print Quality and Density (Special
Mode M),” on p. 4-70.
Customizing Settings

2 Press [▼] or [▲] until [Special Mode S] appears ➞

press [Special Mode S].

4-80 Cleaning and Adjusting the Machine

3 Select [Speed Priority 1], [Speed Priority 2], or [Off] ➞ press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below:

[Speed Priority 1]: Reduces the waiting time. Printing resumes quickly.
4
[Speed Priority 2]: Reduces the waiting time to a lesser degree.

Customizing Settings
[Off]: Does not reduce waiting time.

The selected mode is set.

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.

Cleaning and Adjusting the Machine 4-81

 Adjusting Output Speed in the Rotate Collate Mode
Printing with the Rotate Collate mode involves two different paper sources, and a certain wait
time is required to switch them. You can make this wait time shorter or longer by selecting
whether to give priority to the speed or image quality.

NOTE
The default setting is ‘Speed Priority 1’.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Adjustment/Cleaning].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of “Improving Print Quality and Density (Special
Mode M),” on p. 4-70.

4 2 Press [▼] or [▲] until [Rotate Collate Adjustment] appears ➞ press

[Rotate Collate Adjustment].
Customizing Settings

3 Select [Speed Priority 1], [Speed Priority 2], or [Image Priority] ➞ press
[OK].

4-82 Cleaning and Adjusting the Machine

 Details of each item are shown below.
[Speed Priority 1]: Shortest wait time.
[Speed Priority 2]: Medium wait time.
[Image Priority]: Longest wait time.

The selected mode is set.

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.

Customizing Settings

Cleaning and Adjusting the Machine 4-83

 Feeder Smudge Adjustment
If the feeder is dirty, dots or lines may appear on copies or prints. The Auto Adjustment for Dirty
Feeder mode prevents dirt and grime in the feeder from appearing on your prints and copies.

IMPORTANT
If either [JPEG] or [PDF (Compact)] is selected for [File Format] when the Send function is used, the
setting for this mode is not applied.

NOTE
• This mode is available only if the feeder (DADF-P2) is attached to the machine.
• While some dots or lines may continue to be printed even if the Auto Adjustment for Dirty Feeder mode
is set to ‘On’, copies are significantly clearer than when this mode is set to ‘Off’.
• The default setting is ‘On’.

4
1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Adjustment/Cleaning].
Customizing Settings

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of “Improving Print Quality and Density (Special
Mode M),” on p. 4-70.

2 Press [▼] or [▲] until [Auto Adjustment for Dirty Feeder] appears ➞
press [Auto Adjustment for Dirty Feeder].

4-84 Cleaning and Adjusting the Machine

3 Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].

The selected mode is set.

4
4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.

Customizing Settings

Cleaning and Adjusting the Machine 4-85

 4
Customizing Settings

4-86 Cleaning and Adjusting the Machine

Checking Job and Device
Status
This chapter explains how to check the counter, and how to use the System Monitor screen to change or
5
CHAPTER

check the status of print and copy jobs.

Checking the Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Checking Job Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Copy/Print Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Canceling Copy/Print Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

5-1
 Checking the Counter

You can check the machine’s copy and print page counts.

1 Press (1 2 3) on the control panel.

5
Checking Job and Device Status

The various counts are shown on the touch panel display.

2 Press [Done].
The display returns to the Basic Features screen.

5-2 Checking the Counter

Checking Job Status

If you press [System Monitor], the System Monitor screen appears, enabling you to check the
status and log of Copy, Send/Fax, Report, and Print jobs.
By displaying the status for each job type, it is possible to check the current job or a job waiting
to be processed. By displaying the Log, you can view all of the completed jobs or confirm that a
job has been processed. It is also possible to print a fax transmissions/receptions report from
the System Monitor screen.
From the System Monitor screen, it is possible to quickly acquire information about the
machine, check whether paper is loaded in all of the standard and optional paper sources,
check the available system memory, and the status of consumables. You can also view a list of
error messages.

NOTE 5
• Many of the check/change operations can also be performed from the Remote UI. (Chapter 2,

Checking Job and Device Status

“Checking and Managing Functions,” in the Remote UI Guide.)
• If the Job Log Display in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to ‘Off’, the
following items are not displayed on the System Monitor screen:
- Copy Log, TX Job Log, RX Job Report, Fax Log, and Print Log
• The Send function is available only if the optional Color Send Kit (standard for the iR2022i/iR2018i) is
activated.
• The Fax function is available only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed.

Checking Job Status 5-3

 1 Press [System Monitor].

2 From the keys located at the top of the System Monitor screen, select
5 the job type that you want to check or change, or press [Device] to
display the current status of the machine.
Checking Job and Device Status

5-4 Checking Job Status

● If a job type ([Copy], [RX/TX], [Fax], or [Print]) is selected:
❑ Press [Status] to check the jobs currently being processed or waiting to be processed.

The example above shows the screen that is displayed when [Copy] is selected.
If [RX/TX] is selected, press [TX Job Status].
If [Fax] is selected, press [TX Job Status] or [RX Job Status] instead.

NOTE 5
For instructions on checking the status of Fax or RX/TX jobs, see Chapter 7, “Checking/

Checking Job and Device Status

Changing the Send/Receive Status,” in the Sending and Facsimile Guide.
❑ Press [Log] to check the jobs that have already been processed.

The log is organized according to the type of job. When [Print] is selected, you can press
[Job Type] to select the type of job whose log you want to check.
When you press [RX Job Report], followed by [I-Fax Mem. Lock Doc.] and [Forwarding
Er.Status], I-Fax Forwarding Error Status is displayed.

Checking Job Status 5-5

 NOTE
• The status of Receive jobs can only be confirmed by the log.
• The table below describes the icons that are displayed on the status and log screens.

Icon (Job Status) Description

Executing

Waiting

Canceling

Icon (Job Type) Description

Copy Job

Fax Job

I-Fax Job

5 E-mail Job

File job
Checking Job and Device Status

Print Job

Report Print Job

• The most recent 100 copy, fax, or print jobs, and a total of the most recent 100 send and receive
jobs are displayed in the log.

5-6 Checking Job Status

● If [Device] is selected:
❑ Check the current machine status.

The status of the device and the current

job are displayed here.

This area displays recovery procedures for

problems, such as clearing a paper jam or
replacing the toner and staple cartridges. 5
The status of toner is displayed.

Checking Job and Device Status

The remaining amount of available system memory
is displayed in percentage.
The paper supply, and the paper type
and paper size loaded in the paper drawer(s) and
optional Cassette Feeding Module-P1* and
Cassette Feeding Module-Q1 are displayed.

* The Cassette Feeding Module-P1 cannot be used with the iR2030/iR2025/iR2022i.

NOTE
The jobs may not be accepted even if [Avail. Memory] has not reached zero percent. In this case,
print or delete jobs stored in the memory and try again.

Checking Job Status 5-7

 ❑ Press [Consumable] to display the status of toner.
❑ When you are finished checking the status of toner, press [Done].

3 Press [Done].
The display returns to the Basic Features screen.
5
Checking Job and Device Status

5-8 Checking Job Status

Copy/Print Job Details

You can check the details of copy and print jobs, such as the date and time the machine
received and processed the jobs, and the number of pages.

NOTE
If the Job Log Display in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to ‘Off’, the
following items are not displayed on the System Monitor screen:
- Copy Log, TX Job Log, RX Job Report, Fax Log, and Print Log

1 Press [System Monitor] ➞ select the job type ([Copy] or [Print]).

5

Checking Job and Device Status

Copy/Print Job Details 5-9

 2 Press [Status] or [Log] ➞ select the job whose details you want to
check ➞ press [Details].

3 Check the detailed information ➞ press [Done] repeatedly until the

Basic Features screen appears.
5
Checking Job and Device Status

5-10 Copy/Print Job Details

Canceling Copy/Print Jobs

You can cancel a copy or print job while it is waiting to be processed or during printing.

NOTE
• Scanning jobs can be canceled by pressing (Stop).
• To cancel the current job using the touch panel display, see Chapter 1, “Introduction to Copying,” in the
Copying Guide and Chapter 1, “Introduction to Sending and Fax Functions,” in the Sending and
Facsimile Guide.

1 Press [System Monitor] ➞ select the job type [Copy] or [Print].

Checking Job and Device Status

2 Press [Status] ➞ select the job you want to cancel ➞ press [Cancel].

Canceling Copy/Print Jobs 5-11

 3 Press [Yes], if you want to cancel the job.

If you do not want to cancel the job, press [No].

4 Press [Done].
5
Checking Job and Device Status

5-12 Canceling Copy/Print Jobs

System Manager Settings
This chapter describes the settings that can be made by the person in charge of the machine’s operation,
6
CHAPTER

such as the System Manager.

Specifying the System Manager Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Department ID Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Registering the Department ID, Password, and Page Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Changing the Password and Page Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Erasing the Department ID and Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Checking and Printing Counter Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Clearing Page Totals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Accepting Print and Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Device Information Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Managing User IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Remote UI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Restricting the Send Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Setting a Password for the Address Book. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Restricting the New Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Restricting PC Faxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
Restricting Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Confirming Entered Fax Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Restricting Broadcasting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Checking the Job Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Restricting the USB Interface Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Displaying Department ID/User Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Printing/Storing Received Documents When Document Forwarding Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Auto Online/Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Auto Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Auto Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
Detecting and Installing Drivers that Support Functions Specified on
the Machine into Your Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63

6-1
 Specifying the System Manager Settings

You can set an ID and a password for the System Manager. Once the System Manager ID/
password is set, restrictions can be placed on storing or changing the System Settings.
The System Manager Settings can be set in the Additional Functions screen. For instructions,
see “What Are Additional Functions?,” on p. 4-2.

IMPORTANT
• Attaching the optional Card Reader-E1 erases the System Manager ID and System Password that have
been stored.
• If User ID Management is set to ‘On’, Department ID Management is set to ‘Off’, and the System
Manager ID or System Password is not specified, all of the users may be considered as the
Administrator even without authentication.
• When User ID Management is set to ‘On’, users whose user type is registered as “User” (end users)
cannot change the System Manager Settings even if there are no System Manager ID and System
Password set.
• If User ID Management is set to ‘On’, users whose user type is registered as “Administrator” can change
6 the System Manager Settings by entering the System Manager ID and System Password, or registering
the System Manager ID and System Password as their user information in advance.
System Manager Settings

NOTE
• If the optional Card Reader-E1 is attached, the numbers 1 to 1000 cannot be used for the System
Manager ID.
• For instructions on entering characters, see “Entering Characters from the Touch Panel Display,” on
p. 2-19.
• You can enter a maximum of 32 characters for a name.
• You cannot store a System Manager ID or password that only consists of zeros, such as <0000000>.
If you enter fewer than seven digits, the machine stores them with leading zeros.
- Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.

6-2 Specifying the System Manager Settings

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) ➞ press (Log In/Out).

2 Press [System Manager Settings].

System Manager Settings

NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼ ] or [▲ ] to scroll to the desired setting.

Specifying the System Manager Settings 6-3

 3 Press [System Manager] ➞ enter the System Manager’s name ➞ press
[OK].

4 Press [System Manager ID] ➞ enter a number (up to seven digits)

using - (numeric keys).

6
System Manager Settings

You cannot store a System Manager ID that only consists of zeros, such as <0000000>.
If you enter fewer than seven digits, the machine stores the System Manager ID with leading
zeros.
Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.

NOTE
If you make a mistake when entering a number, press (Clear) to clear the entire number.

6-4 Specifying the System Manager Settings

5 Press [System Password] ➞ enter a number (up to seven digits) using
- (numeric keys) ➞ press [OK].

You must set both System Manager ID and password to manage the operations of the machine.
You cannot store a password that only consists of zeros, such as <0000000>.
If you enter fewer than seven digits, the machine stores the password with leading zeros.
Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.
To cancel storing the System Manager Settings, press [Cancel].
The display returns to the Basic Features screen.
6
NOTE

System Manager Settings

If you make a mistake when entering the password, press (Clear) to clear the password.

Specifying the System Manager Settings 6-5

 Department ID Management

You can register a Department ID and password for each department, and manage the machine
by limiting its use to only those who enter the correct Department ID and password. This is
called Department ID Management. Department IDs and passwords for up to 1000
departments can be registered. Use Department ID Management to keep track of the copy,
scan, and print totals for each department.
With Department ID Management, the following settings can be specified:
• Turn Department ID Management ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
• Register the Department ID and password.
• Set page limits for scans, prints, and copies.
• Accept or reject print and scan jobs from computers with unknown IDs.

The Department ID Management Settings can be set in the Additional Functions screen. For
instructions, see “What Are Additional Functions?,” on p. 4-2.
After editing settings on Department ID Management, make sure to press (Log In/Out) to
6 return to the screen for entering the Department ID and password.
System Manager Settings

IMPORTANT
• If the optional Card Reader-E1 is attached, Department ID Management is automatically activated. (See
“Card Reader-E1,” on p. 3-19.)
• Do not change the password when using a control card. The control card will become unusable if the
password for the Department ID is changed.
• If User ID Management is set to ‘On’, Department ID Management is performed on the Department IDs
that correspond to registered users.
• If User ID Management is set to ‘On’, the registered User ID and password in Department ID
Management of the machine must be matched. If the registered User ID and password in Department
ID are changed due to the changes made in “Device Information Settings,” on p. 6-32, make sure that
you change the user information accordingly. For instructions on how to set User ID and password, see
the Remote UI Guide.

6-6 Department ID Management

 NOTE
• You cannot store a Department ID or password that only consists of zeros, such as <0000000>.
If you enter fewer than seven digits, the machine stores them with leading zeros.
- Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.
• You can set the page limit from 0 to 999,999 pages.
• For the detailed information on the User ID Management, see “Using the User ID Management,” on
p. 2-29 and “Managing User IDs,” on p. 6-34.
• The default setting is ‘Off’.

Registering the Department ID, Password, and Page Limit

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞

[Department ID Management].

System Manager Settings

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) ➞ press (Log In/Out).

NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼ ] or [▲ ] to scroll to the desired setting.

Department ID Management 6-7

 2 Press [On].

If you do not want to store a Department ID, password, or page limit restriction, press [Off] ➞
proceed to step 11.

3 Press [Register ID/Password].

6
System Manager Settings

6-8 Department ID Management

4 Press [Register].

5 Use - (numeric keys) to enter the Department ID and password.

❑ Press [Department ID] ➞ enter the Department ID.
❑ Press [Password] ➞ enter the password.

System Manager Settings

You cannot store a Department ID or password that only consists of zeros, such as
<0000000>. If you enter fewer than seven digits, the machine stores them with leading
zeros.
Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.

NOTE
• If you make a mistake when entering a number, press (Clear) to clear the entire number.
• If you do not want to set a password, you can use the machine by entering only the Department
ID.

Department ID Management 6-9

 6 If you want to set a page limit restriction, press [Turn Limits On/Off and
Set Page Limits].

7 Press [On] under the desired function(s).

6
System Manager Settings

Press [Off], if you do not want to set a page limit restriction for the function.

NOTE
• <Total Print Limit> is the sum of <Copy Limit> and <Print Limit>.
• <B&W Scan Limit> and <Color Scan Limit> appear only if the Color Send Kit (standard for the
iR2022i/iR2018i) is activated.
• <Scan Limit> appears if only the optional Super G3 FAX Board (standard for some models and
regions) is installed.

6-10 Department ID Management

8 Press [ ] (Page Limit) next to [On]/[Off] of the desired function(s) ➞
enter the page limit restriction using - (numeric keys).

IMPORTANT
• The machine stops sending a fax if the Scan Limit is reached while faxing a document either
from memory or directly to the recipient.
• The machine stops scanning if the Scan Limit is reached while the machine is scanning originals
that are being fed from the feeder. (Those originals that were scanned before the limit was
reached are not added to the scan count.)
6
NOTE

System Manager Settings

• If you make a mistake when entering a number, press (Clear) to clear the number.
• You can set the page limit from 0 to 999,999 pages. Once the page limit is reached, copying,
scanning, or printing is not possible.
• The page limit refers to the number of printed surfaces. Therefore, a two-sided print is counted as
two pages.

Department ID Management 6-11

 9 Press [OK] ➞ [OK].

The page limit(s) for the selected function(s) are set.

10 Press [Done].

6
System Manager Settings

6-12 Department ID Management

11 Press [OK].

NOTE
If you selected [On] in step 2, pressing [OK] activates Department ID Management.

12 Press [Done] repeatedly until the screen below appears.

System Manager Settings

NOTE
For instructions on entering the Department ID and password, see “Entering the Department ID
and Password,” on p. 2-25.

Department ID Management 6-13

 Changing the Password and Page Limit
You can change the password and page limit settings that you have registered.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞

[Department ID Management].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of “Registering the Department ID, Password, and
Page Limit,” on p. 6-7.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) ➞ press (Log In/Out).

NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼ ] or [▲ ] to scroll to the desired setting.

2 Press [On] ➞ [Register ID/Password].

6
System Manager Settings

6-14 Department ID Management

3 Press [▼] or [▲] to display the Department ID whose password you
want to change ➞ select the Department ID ➞ press [Edit].

NOTE
Press and hold down [▼ ] or [▲ ] to quickly and continuously scroll through the available
Department ID pages. Continuous scrolling is useful when a large number of Department IDs are
registered.

4 Enter the new password (up to seven digits) using 6

- (numeric keys).

You cannot store a password that only consists of zeros, such as <0000000>. System Manager Settings
If you enter fewer than seven digits, the machine stores the password with leading zeros.
Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.

Department ID Management 6-15

 NOTE
• If you make a mistake when entering the password, press (Clear) to clear the password.
• You cannot change the Department ID.

5 If you want to change or set a page limit restriction, press [Turn Limits
On/Off and Set Page Limits].

6
System Manager Settings

6-16 Department ID Management

6 Change the page limit restriction if necessary.
❑ Press [On] under the desired function(s).
❑ Press [ ] (Page Limit) next to [On]/[Off] of the desired function(s) ➞ enter the page limit
restriction using - (numeric keys).
❑ Press [OK] ➞ [OK].

If you do not want to set a page limit restriction for a function, press [Off] under the desired
function’s name.
The page limit(s) for the selected function(s) are set.
6
NOTE

System Manager Settings

• If you make a mistake when entering a number, press (Clear) to clear the number.
• You can set the page limit from 0 to 999,999 pages. Once the page limit is reached, copying,
scanning, or printing is not possible.
• The page limit refers to the number of printed surfaces. Therefore, a two-sided print is counted as
two pages.

Department ID Management 6-17

 7 Press [Done].

8 Press [OK].

6
System Manager Settings

NOTE
If you selected [On] in step 2, pressing [OK] activates Department ID Management.

6-18 Department ID Management

Erasing the Department ID and Password
You can erase the Department ID and password that you have registered.

NOTE
If Department ID Management is activated through the optional Card Reader-E1, you cannot delete the
Department ID.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞

[Department ID Management].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of “Registering the Department ID, Password, and
Page Limit,” on p. 6-7.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) ➞ press (Log In/Out).

NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼ ] or [▲ ] to scroll to the desired setting.

2 Press [On] ➞ [Register ID/Password]. 6

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 2 of “Changing the Password and Page Limit,” on

System Manager Settings

p. 6-14.

Department ID Management 6-19

 3 Press [▼] or [▲] to display the Department ID that you want to erase ➞
select the Department ID ➞ press [Erase].

NOTE
Press and hold down [▼ ] or [▲ ] to quickly and continuously scroll through the available
Department ID pages. Continuous scrolling is useful when a large number of Department IDs are
registered.

6 4 Press [Yes].
System Manager Settings

If you do not want to erase the selected Department ID and all of its settings, press [No].
The selected Department ID and all of its settings are erased.

6-20 Department ID Management

5 Press [Done].

6 Press [OK].

System Manager Settings

NOTE
If you selected [On] in step 2, pressing [OK] activates Department ID Management.

Department ID Management 6-21

 Checking and Printing Counter Information
You can display and print a list of how much paper was used by each department.

NOTE
For instructions on registering user information on User ID Management, see the Remote UI Guide.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞

[Department ID Management].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of “Registering the Department ID, Password, and
Page Limit,” on p. 6-7.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) ➞ press (Log In/Out).

NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼ ] or [▲ ] to scroll to the desired setting.

2 Press [On] ➞ [Page Totals].

6
System Manager Settings

6-22 Department ID Management

3 Check or print the page total count.
The print page totals that belong to print jobs without a Department ID (left blank) are the
number of prints from computers that do not correspond with a registered Department ID.
These prints are referred to as prints with unknown IDs.
The scan page totals that belong to scan jobs without a Department ID (left blank) are the
number of pages that have been scanned from computers that do not correspond with a
registered Department ID. The scanned pages from computers are referred to as network
scans with unknown IDs.

● If you only want to check the counter information:

❑ Press [▼] or [▲] to display the desired Department ID ➞ press [ ] or [ ] to display and view
the desired page totals.

System Manager Settings

NOTE
Press and hold down [▼ ] or [▲ ] to quickly and continuously scroll through the available
Department ID pages. Continuous scrolling is useful when a large number of Department IDs are
registered.

Department ID Management 6-23

 ● If you want to print the displayed list:
❑ Press [Print List].

❑ Press [Yes].

6
System Manager Settings

If you do not want to print the displayed list, press [No].

Printing starts.

6-24 Department ID Management

 The screen below is displayed while the machine is printing the counter information.

NOTE
• To cancel printing, press [Cancel].
• To close the screen that is displayed while the machine is printing the Page Count List, press
[Done].
• The counter information can be printed only if A3, A4, or A4R (plain, recycled, or color paper) is
loaded in a paper source that is set to ‘On’ when you press [Other] to select a paper source in
Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
(See “Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer Switching,” on p. 4-27.)
6
4

System Manager Settings

Press [Done].

Department ID Management 6-25

 5 Press [OK].

NOTE
If you selected [On] in step 2, pressing [OK] activates Department ID Management.

Clearing Page Totals

You can clear the page totals made for all departments or for specific departments.
6
System Manager Settings

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞

[Department ID Management].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of “Registering the Department ID, Password, and
Page Limit,” on p. 6-7.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) ➞ press (Log In/Out).

NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼ ] or [▲ ] to scroll to the desired setting.

6-26 Department ID Management

2 Press [On] ➞ [Page Totals].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 2 of “Checking and Printing Counter Information,” on
p. 6-22.

3 Press [Clear All Totals].

To clear one page total at a time by Department ID, press [▼] or [▲] to display the desired
Department ID ➞ select the Department ID ➞ press [Clear].

6
4 Press [Yes].

If you do not want to clear the page totals, press [No]. System Manager Settings

Department ID Management 6-27

 The message <Erased.> appears for approximately two seconds on the touch panel display.

The page totals are cleared.

5 Press [Done].

6
System Manager Settings

6-28 Department ID Management

6 Press [OK].

NOTE
If you selected [On] in step 2, pressing [OK] activates Department ID Management.

System Manager Settings

Department ID Management 6-29

 Accepting Print and Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs
You can specify whether to accept or reject print and network scan jobs from computers that do
not correspond to any registered Department ID.

NOTE
The default setting is ‘On’ for both <Allow ID Unknown Printer Jobs> and <Allow ID Unknown Remote
Scan Jobs>.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞

[Department ID Management].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of “Registering the Department ID, Password, and
Page Limit,” on p. 6-7.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) ➞ press (Log In/Out).

NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼ ] or [▲ ] to scroll to the desired setting.

6 2 Press [On].
System Manager Settings

6-30 Department ID Management

3 Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

Allow ID Unknown Printer Jobs:
[On]: The machine accepts print jobs from computers that do not correspond with a
registered Department ID.
[Off]: The machine does not accept print jobs from computers that do not correspond with
a registered Department ID, and you must enter a Department ID and password to
operate the machine.
Allow ID Unknown Remote Scan Jobs:
6

System Manager Settings

[On]: The machine accepts remote scan jobs from computers that do not correspond with
a registered Department ID.
[Off]: The machine does not accept remote scan jobs from computers that do not
correspond with a registered Department ID.

NOTE
If you selected [On] in step 2, pressing [OK] activates Department ID Management.

Department ID Management 6-31

 Device Information Settings

Device Information Settings enables you to set a name for the machine, and enter information
regarding its location.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Device Info

Settings].

6
System Manager Settings

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) ➞ press (Log In/Out).

NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼ ] or [▲ ] to scroll to the desired setting.

6-32 Device Information Settings

2 Enter the name and location of the machine.
❑ Press [Device Name] ➞ enter the name of the machine ➞ press [OK].
❑ Press [Location] ➞ enter the place where the machine is located ➞
press [OK].
❑ Press [OK].

The maximum number of characters that can be entered is 32.

If you do not want to store the name and location of the machine, press [Cancel].
The device name and the location of the machine are set.
6
NOTE

System Manager Settings

For instructions on entering characters, see “Entering Characters from the Touch Panel Display,”
on p. 2-19.

3 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.

Device Information Settings 6-33

 Managing User IDs

You can set whether or not to use the User ID Management.

The User ID Management function enables you to register information for each of the User IDs
from 0001 to 1000.

IMPORTANT
• The User ID and password can be registered only from the Remote UI. For more information on the
User ID Management, see the Remote UI Guide.
• You need to register the User ID and password before you set this mode to ‘On’.

NOTE
One Department ID can be registered for each User ID.

6 1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [User ID

Management].
System Manager Settings

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) ➞ press (Log In/Out).

NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼ ] or [▲ ] to scroll to the desired setting.

6-34 Managing User IDs

2 Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].

The selected mode is set.

3 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.

System Manager Settings

Managing User IDs 6-35

 Remote UI

You can set whether to enable the Remote UI to operate the machine and change settings.

NOTE
• For more information on the Remote UI, see the Remote UI Guide.
• For instructions on configuring the Ethernet port, see the Network Guide.
• The default setting is ‘On’.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings] ➞ [Remote UI On/

Off].

6
System Manager Settings

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) ➞ press (Log In/Out).

NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼ ] or [▲ ] to scroll to the desired setting.

6-36 Remote UI
2 Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: Settings can be specified and the machine can be operated through the Remote UI.

[Off]: Settings cannot be specified and the machine cannot be operated through the
Remote UI.

The selected mode is set.

NOTE 6
The Remote UI is enabled only after you restart the machine (the main power switch is turned

System Manager Settings

OFF, and then back ON).

3 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.

Remote UI 6-37
 Restricting the Send Function

This section explains how to set a password for the Address Book, restrict the use of new
addresses, set permissions for sending faxes from the fax driver, restrict recalling and
broadcasting, and confirm entered fax numbers.

NOTE
The modes described in this section are available only if the optional Color Send Kit (standard for the
iR2022i/iR2018i) is activated or the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed.

Setting a Password for the Address Book

If you set a password, the screen for entering the password appears when you attempt to edit
the Address Book.

NOTE
6 No password is set by default.
System Manager Settings

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of “Specifying the System Manager Settings,” on
p. 6-2.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) ➞ press (Log In/Out).

2 Press [▼] or [▲] until [Restrict the Send Function] appears ➞ press
[Restrict the Send Function].

6-38 Restricting the Send Function

3 Press [Address Book Password].

4 Enter a password using - (numeric keys).

System Manager Settings

You cannot store a password that only consists of zeros, such as <0000000>.
If you enter fewer than seven digits, the machine stores the password with leading zeros.
Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.

NOTE
Press (Clear) to delete the entire entry.

5 Press [OK].

6 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.

NOTE
If you want to cancel password protection, go back to the [Address Book Password] screen and
press (Clear) to clear the stored password.

Restricting the Send Function 6-39

 Restricting the New Address
This mode enables you to restrict the entering of new destinations. When you set Restrict New
Addresses to ‘On’, the following are restricted:
• Specifying a destination using - (numeric keys).
• Registering new destinations with New Address on the Send Basic Features screen.

NOTE
The default setting is ‘Off’.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of “Specifying the System Manager Settings,” on
p. 6-2.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) ➞ press (Log In/Out).

2 Press [▼] or [▲] until [Restrict the Send Function] appears ➞ press
[Restrict the Send Function].
6
System Manager Settings

3 Select [Restrict New Addresses]

6-40 Restricting the Send Function

4 Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: Specifying a destination using - (numeric keys) or the new address tab is
restricted.

[Off]: Specifying a destination using - (numeric keys) or the new address tab is
enabled.

The selected mode is set.

6
5

System Manager Settings

Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.

Restricting the Send Function 6-41

 Restricting PC Faxing
When Allow Fax Driver TX is set to ‘On’, you can send faxes from computers using the fax
driver.

NOTE
• This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed.
• The default setting is ‘On’.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of “Specifying the System Manager Settings,” on
p. 6-2.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) ➞ press (Log In/Out).

2 Press [▼] or [▲] until [Restrict the Send Function] appears ➞ press
[Restrict the Send Function].

6
3 Select [Allow Fax Driver TX].
System Manager Settings

6-42 Restricting the Send Function

4 Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: Sending fax from the computers using the fax driver is enabled.
[Off]: Sending fax from the computers using the fax driver is restricted.

The selected mode is set.

5 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears. 6

System Manager Settings

Restricting the Send Function 6-43

 Restricting Recall
This mode enables you to restrict the use of Recall function.

NOTE
The default setting is ‘Off’.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of “Specifying the System Manager Settings,” on
p. 6-2.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) ➞ press (Log In/Out).

2 Press [▼] or [▲] until [Restrict the Send Function] appears ➞ press
[Restrict the Send Function].

3 Select [Restrict Recall]

6
System Manager Settings

6-44 Restricting the Send Function

4 Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].

The selected mode is set.

5 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.

System Manager Settings

Restricting the Send Function 6-45

 Confirming Entered Fax Numbers
You can specify whether or not to confirm the entered fax numbers each time you send a fax.

NOTE
• This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed.
• The default setting is ‘Off’.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of “Specifying the System Manager Settings,” on
p. 6-2.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) ➞ press (Log In/Out).

2 Press [▼] or [▲] until [Restrict the Send Function] appears ➞ press
[Restrict the Send Function].

6 3 Press [▼] or [▲] until [Confirm Entered Fax Numbers] appears ➞ press
[Confirm Entered Fax Numbers].
System Manager Settings

6-46 Restricting the Send Function

4 Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: When you enter a new fax number using - (numeric keys), the confirmation
screen appears.
[Off]: Skips the confirmation screen.

5 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.

6

System Manager Settings

Restricting the Send Function 6-47

 Restricting Broadcasting
This mode enables you to restrict sending to multiple destinations (except for those registered in
a group address).

NOTE
• This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed.
• The default setting is ‘Off’.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of “Specifying the System Manager Settings,” on
p. 6-2.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) ➞ press (Log In/Out).

2 Press [▼] or [▲] until [Restrict the Send Function] appears ➞ press
[Restrict the Send Function].

6
3 Press [▼] or [▲] until [Restrict Sequential Broadcast] appears ➞ press
System Manager Settings

[Restrict Sequential Broadcast].

6-48 Restricting the Send Function

4 Select [Broadcast Confirmation], [Prohibit Broadcast], or [Off] ➞ press
[OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Broadcast Confirmation]: A confirmation message appears if you try to send documents with
sequential broadcasting.
[Prohibit Broadcast]: You cannot send documents with sequential broadcasting.
[Off]: Sending documents with sequential broadcasting is not restricted.

The selected mode is set. 6

System Manager Settings

5 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.

Restricting the Send Function 6-49

 Checking the Job Log

You can specify whether or not to check the job log. When you set [Job Log Display] to ‘On’, you
can check the job log using the System Monitor screen. When you set [Job Log Display] to ‘Off’,
the job log does not appear on the System Monitor screen.

NOTE
• For more information on the System Monitor screen, see “Checking Job Status,” on p. 5-3.
• When you set [Job Log Display] to ‘Off’, Activity Reports will not be printed automatically.
• The default setting is ‘On’.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of “Specifying the System Manager Settings,” on
p. 6-2.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID
6 and System Password using - (numeric keys) ➞ press (Log In/Out).
System Manager Settings

2 Press [▼] or [▲] until [Job Log Display] appears ➞ press [Job Log
Display].

6-50 Checking the Job Log

3 Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK]

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: The job log is displayed on the System Monitor screen.
[Off]: The job log is not displayed on the System Monitor screen.

The selected mode is set.

IMPORTANT
When you set [Job Log Display] to ‘Off’, the job log does not appear on the System Monitor
screen and the Activity Report will not be printed automatically.
6

System Manager Settings

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Feature screen appears.

Checking the Job Log 6-51

 Restricting the USB Interface Port

Follow the procedure below to restrict jobs through the USB interface.

NOTE
The default setting is ‘On’.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of “Specifying the System Manager Settings,” on
p. 6-2.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) ➞ press (Log In/Out).

6 2 Press [▼] or [▲] until [Use USB Device] appears ➞ press [Use USB
Device].
System Manager Settings

6-52 Restricting the USB Interface Port

3 Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: The machine can receive the job through the USB interface.
[Off]: The machine cannot receive the job through the USB interface.

The selected mode is set.

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Feature screen appears.

6

System Manager Settings

Restricting the USB Interface Port 6-53

 Displaying Department ID/User Name

You can set whether or not to display the Department ID on the Job/Print Status Display Area of
the touch panel display.

NOTE
• For more information on the Department ID Management, see “Department ID Management,” on p. 6-6.
• The default setting is ‘On’.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of “Specifying the System Manager Settings,” on
p. 6-2.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) ➞ press (Log In/Out).

6
2 Press [▼] or [▲] until [Display Dept. ID/User Name] appears ➞ press
System Manager Settings

[Display Dept. ID/User Name].

6-54 Displaying Department ID/User Name

3 Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: The Department ID is displayed on the Job/Print Status Display Area.
[Off]: The Department ID is not displayed on the Job/Print Status Display Area.

The selected mode is set.

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Feature screen appears. 6

System Manager Settings

Displaying Department ID/User Name 6-55

 Printing/Storing Received Documents When
Document Forwarding Fails

You can set the machine to print and/or store received documents when document forwarding
fails.

NOTE
The default setting is ‘On’ for <Print Image>, and ‘Off’ for <Store Image to Memory>.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of “Specifying the System Manager Settings,” on
p. 6-2.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) ➞ press (Log In/Out).

6 2 Press [▼] or [▲] until [Failed Forwarding Document Set.] appears ➞

press [Failed Forwarding Document Set.].
System Manager Settings

6-56 Printing/Storing Received Documents When Document Forwarding Fails

3 Press [Print Image].

4 Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].

System Manager Settings

Details of each item are shown below.
[On]: Prints out the image if forwarding fails when [Memory Lock] is set to ‘Off’.
[Off]: Does not print the image.

5 Press [Store Image to Memory].

Printing/Storing Received Documents When Document Forwarding Fails 6-57

 6 Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: Stores the image in memory if forwarding fails.
[Off]: Does not store the image.
The selected mode is set.

7 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Feature screen appears.

6
System Manager Settings

6-58 Printing/Storing Received Documents When Document Forwarding Fails

Auto Online/Offline

To use the Network Scan function, the machine must be connected to a network, and must be
separately switched online to the network. This section explains how to switch the machine
online and offline to use the Network Scan function.

NOTE
For more information on the Network Scan function, see the Color Network ScanGear User’s Guide.

Auto Online
If Auto Online is set to ‘On’, the machine automatically goes online when you press (Scan)
on the control panel.

NOTE
The default setting is ‘Off’.
6

System Manager Settings

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings].
If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of “Specifying the System Manager Settings,” on
p. 6-2.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) ➞ press (Log In/Out).

2 Press [▼] or [▲] until [Auto Online/Offline] appears ➞ press [Auto

Online/Offline].

Auto Online/Offline 6-59

 3 Press [Auto Online].

4 Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].

6
System Manager Settings

The selected mode is set.

5 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.

6-60 Auto Online/Offline

Auto Offline
If the machine is connected to a network that is online, scanning is not possible with the Copy
function. By setting Auto Offline to ‘On’, the machine automatically goes offline when the Auto
Clear mode initiates.

NOTE
The default setting is ‘Off’.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of “Specifying the System Manager Settings,” on
p. 6-2.
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID
and System Password using - (numeric keys) ➞ press (Log In/Out).

2 Press [▼] or [▲] until [Auto Online/Offline] appears ➞ press [Auto

Online/Offline].

6
3 Press [Auto Offline].

System Manager Settings

Auto Online/Offline 6-61

 4 Select [On] or [Off] ➞ press [OK].

The selected mode is set.

5 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.

NOTE
If Auto Offline is set to ‘On’, the machine automatically goes offline once the Auto Clear mode
initiates. If the Auto Clear mode is not set (the Auto Clear Time is set to ‘0’), the machine
6 automatically goes offline after approximately two minutes. (See “Auto Clear Time” on p. 4-67.)
System Manager Settings

6-62 Auto Online/Offline

Detecting and Installing Drivers that Support
Functions Specified on the Machine into Your
Computer

From the machine, you can specify functions suitable for the fax board or printer kit installed in
the machine. From your computer, you can detect and install drivers that are compatible with
the specified functions.

IMPORTANT
• The PDL Selection (PnP) function is displayed only when the following options are available for use.
- When the PCL Printer Kit (standard for the iR2022i/iR2018i) is activated.
- When the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed.
• If the desired driver is not in your computer, detection and installation cannot be performed.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [System Settings].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of “Specifying the System Manager Settings,” on
p. 6-2.
6
If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID
(numeric keys) ➞ press

System Manager Settings

and System Password using - (Log In/Out).

2 Press [▼] or [▲] until [PDL Selection (PnP)] appears ➞ press [PDL
Selection (PnP)].

Detecting and Installing Drivers that Support Functions Specified on the Machine 6-63
into Your Computer
 3 Select the button for the function that is applicable to Plug and Play
settings ➞ press [OK].

The displayed function buttons may differ, depending on the optional equipment that is
attached.

4 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Feature screen appears.

6
System Manager Settings

6-64 Detecting and Installing Drivers that Support Functions Specified on the Machine
into Your Computer
Routine Maintenance
This chapter describes how to load paper, perform routine cleaning operations, and replace consumables,
7
CHAPTER

such as toner and staple cartridges.

Paper Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Loading Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Adjusting a Paper Drawer to Hold a Different Paper Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Feeder (DADF-P2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Replacing the Stamp Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Finisher-U2 (Optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Replacing the Staple Cartridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Replacing the Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Drum Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Replacing the Drum Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Affixing the Counter Label for Service Technician . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Routine Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Platen Glass and Underside of the Feeder/Platen Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Manual Feeder Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Offset Roller Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Transfer Roller Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
Drum Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Fixing Unit Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Automatic Feeder Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56

7-1
 Paper Drawers

This section describes how to load paper into the paper drawers.

NOTE
• The following paper sizes can be loaded into the paper drawers 1, 2, 3, and 4.
- A5
- A4
- A4R
- A3
• For the iR2018i, the paper drawer 2 can only be used if the optional Cassette Feeding Module-P1 is
attached to the machine.
• Paper drawers 3 and 4 can only be used if the optional Cassette Feeding Module-Q1 is attached to the
iR2030/iR2025/iR2022i/iR2018i.
• For more information on available paper stock that can be loaded into the paper drawers, see “Available
Paper Stock,” on p. 2-56.

Loading Paper
7 If the selected paper runs out, or the selected paper drawer runs out of paper during printing, a
screen prompting you to load paper appears on the touch panel display, and the error indicator
Routine Maintenance

blinks in red.
Follow the procedure below to load paper into the paper drawers.

7-2 Paper Drawers

CAUTION
When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper.

IMPORTANT
• A screen prompting you to load paper also appears if the selected paper drawer is not fully inserted into
the machine. Make sure that the paper drawer is properly in place.
• Do not load nonstandard paper sizes into the paper drawers.
• Do not load the following types of paper into the paper drawers, as doing so may cause paper jams.
- Severely curled or wrinkled paper
- Lightweight straw paper: less than 64 g/m2 (approximately)
- Transparencies
- Envelopes
- Labels
- Paper on which color images have been copied (Do not copy on the reverse side either.)
- Paper which has been printed on using a thermal transfer printer (Do not print on the reverse side of
this paper either.)
• Fan the stack of paper well before loading it, and align the edges of the paper stack on a flat surface.
• Never place paper or any other items in the empty part of the drawer next to the paper stack. Doing so
may cause paper jams.

NOTE
• If a message prompting you to load paper appears during printing, the remaining prints are
automatically made after you load the correct paper.
• To cancel printing, press [Cancel].
7

Routine Maintenance

Paper Drawers 7-3

 1 Grip the handle of the paper drawer, and pull out the paper drawer until
it stops.

2 Open a package of paper, and remove the paper stack from the
package.

7
Routine Maintenance

CAUTION
When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper.

7-4 Paper Drawers

 IMPORTANT
Rewrap any remaining paper in its original package, and store it in a dry place, away from direct
sunlight.

NOTE
• For high-quality printouts, use paper recommended by Canon.
• Before loading paper, always fan the sheets several times, and align the edges to facilitate
feeding.

3 Push down the metal plate to lock.

Routine Maintenance

Paper Drawers 7-5

 4 Load the paper stack into the paper drawer.
Even out the edges of the paper stack. Load the paper stack against the right wall of the paper
drawer.
When loading paper into the paper drawer for the first time, set the size plate and the paper-size
detecting lever for the paper being loaded. (See “Adjusting a Paper Drawer to Hold a Different
Paper Size,” on p. 7-8.)
When loading paper into the paper drawer, make sure that the paper size setting of the paper
drawer matches the size of paper. (See “Adjusting a Paper Drawer to Hold a Different Paper
Size,” on p. 7-8.)

7
Routine Maintenance

7-6 Paper Drawers

 IMPORTANT
• Paper which has been rolled or curled must be straightened out prior to use.
• Make sure that the height of the paper stack does not exceed the loading limit mark ( ) at the
back of the paper drawer and the corners are below the paper size guide clips.
• Be sure to set the paper-size detecting lever correctly. If the lever is set to the wrong position,
paper jams or dirty prints may occur, or the inside of the machine may get dirty.

NOTE
• Each paper drawer holds approximately 250 sheets of paper (80 g/m2).
• If there are instructions on the package of paper about which side of the paper to load, follow
those instructions.
• When the paper is loaded into the paper drawer, the side facing up is the one printed on.
• If problems occur, such as poor print quality or paper jams, try turning the paper stack over, and
reload it.
• For more information on the print direction of preprinted paper (paper which has logos or
patterns already printed on it), see “Relationship between Original Orientation and Preprinted
Paper Output Chart,” on p. 9-9.

5 Gently push the paper drawer back into the machine until it clicks into
place in the closed position.

Routine Maintenance

Paper Drawers 7-7

 CAUTION
When returning the paper drawer to its original position, be careful not to get your
fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.

IMPORTANT
You will not be able to make copies or prints if you load paper that exceeds the loading limit, or if
the paper drawer is not completely pushed into the machine. Always check that the paper
drawers are in place, and that the paper does not exceed the loading limit.

NOTE
If paper runs out during copying or printing, load a new paper stack, and follow the instructions
on the touch panel display. The machine automatically restarts, and produces the remaining
copies or prints.

Adjusting a Paper Drawer to Hold a Different Paper Size

If you want to change the size of paper in a paper drawer, follow the procedure described below
to adjust the paper drawer guides.

1 Pull out the paper drawer, and remove all of the loaded paper.

7
Routine Maintenance

7-8 Paper Drawers

2 Push down the metal plate to lock.

3 Detach the end guide and reattach it to the slots with the mark
indicating the desired paper size.
Detach the end guide by pressing down and forward. Align the end guide with the mark
indicating the desired paper size. Reattach the end guide by tilting it forward and inserting the
tabs at both ends into the slots. The end guide should then be returned to its vertical, upright
position.

Routine Maintenance
NOTE
Attaching the end guide while pressing down the point indicated with ‘A’.

Paper Drawers 7-9

 4 Lift the lock lever on the side guide to its upright position and slide the
side guide to the groove marked for the desired paper size.

5 Lower the lock lever to the right to lock the side guide.

7
Routine Maintenance

IMPORTANT
Be sure to set the lock lever correctly. If the lock lever is positioned incorrectly to the type of paper
loaded in the paper drawer, the wrong paper type will be shown on the touch panel display. This
may also cause paper jams, dirty prints, or make the inside of the machine dirty.

7-10 Paper Drawers

6 Load the appropriate size of paper into the paper drawer.

CAUTION
When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper.

7 Set the paper-size detecting lever, located on the left side of the paper
drawer, to match the paper size of paper being loaded.

A4 A5 B5 LGL LTR STMT U2

A3 A4 B4 B5 11X17 LTR U1 U3

Routine Maintenance

Paper Drawers 7-11

 IMPORTANT
Be sure to set the paper-size detecting lever correctly. If the lever is positioned incorrectly to the
size of paper loaded in the paper drawer, the wrong paper size will be shown on the touch panel
display. This may also cause paper jams, dirty prints, or make the inside of the machine dirty.

8 Stick the appropriate paper size label on the paper size plate.

9 Change the paper size plate to match the new paper size.

7
Routine Maintenance

7-12 Paper Drawers

10 Gently push the paper drawer back into the machine until it clicks into
place in the closed position.

CAUTION
When returning the paper drawer to its original position, be careful not to get your
fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.

Routine Maintenance

Paper Drawers 7-13

 Feeder (DADF-P2)

Originals sent by the Send function or fax via the feeder, can be stamped to indicate that they
have been sent. Replace the stamp cartridge when this mark is faint or no longer visible.

IMPORTANT
When replacing the stamp cartridge, take care not to allow ink to come in contact with your hands or
clothing. If ink gets onto your hands or clothing, wash it off immediately with cold water.

NOTE
• This procedure is necessary only if the feeder (DADF-P2) is attached.
• The stamp cartridge is optional.

Replacing the Stamp Cartridge

1 Open the feeder cover, then open the inner cover by holding its front
tab.
7
Routine Maintenance

Stamp Cartridge

Inner Cover

7-14 Feeder (DADF-P2)

2 Remove the old stamp cartridge using the tweezers.

NOTE
Widen the tweezers if necessary.

3 Insert a new stamp cartridge into the feeder using the tweezers until it
clicks.

Routine Maintenance
IMPORTANT
• Set the stamp cartridge so that the two projections on the cartridge are aligned with the hollows
on the feeder.
• Be careful that the stamping surface of the stamp cartridge does not protrude.
• Insert the stamp cartridge properly, or it may cause paper jams.

Feeder (DADF-P2) 7-15

 4 Gently close the inner cover and the feeder cover until it clicks.

CAUTION
When closing the covers, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in
personal injury.

7
Routine Maintenance

7-16 Feeder (DADF-P2)

Finisher-U2 (Optional)

This section describes the procedure for replacing the staple cartridge in the optional
Finisher-U2.

Replacing the Staple Cartridge

When the optional Finisher-U2 is almost out of staples and the staple cartridge needs to be
replaced, a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the touch panel display. Follow
the procedure described below to replace the staple cartridge.
Use only staple cartridges recommended for use on this machine.

Routine Maintenance
NOTE
We recommend that you order the staple cartridges from your local authorized Canon dealer before
your stock runs out.

Finisher-U2 (Optional) 7-17

 1 Open the front cover of the finisher.

2 Pull out the staple case, holding the tab as illustrated below.

7
Routine Maintenance

7-18 Finisher-U2 (Optional)

3 Press the area indicated by PUSH, and then pull out the staple
cartridge.
Place the staple case, as shown below, and pull out the staple cartridge.

4 Insert the new staple cartridge.

Press down the spring-loaded case until it clicks.

Routine Maintenance
IMPORTANT
• Use only staple cartridges recommended for use on this machine.
• Do not remove the seal that holds the staples together before you place the staple cartridge into
the staple case.

NOTE
Only one staple cartridge can be inserted at a time.

Finisher-U2 (Optional) 7-19

 5 Remove the seal holding the staples together, by pulling it straight out,
and then down.

IMPORTANT
Make sure that you pull the seal straight out, and then down. If you pull it out at an angle, it may
tear.

6 Gently push the staple case into the finisher until it is securely in
place.

7
Routine Maintenance

7-20 Finisher-U2 (Optional)

7 Close the front cover of the finisher.

CAUTION
When closing the front cover of the finisher, be careful not to get your fingers caught,
as this may result in personal injury.

NOTE
If there are no staples ready for stapling after the cover is closed, the stapler unit automatically
performs a “dry” stapling operation to reposition the staples.

Routine Maintenance

Finisher-U2 (Optional) 7-21

 Replacing the Toner Cartridge

When there is only a small amount of toner remaining inside the machine, the following
message appears on the touch panel display. You may continue printing, but it is highly
recommended that you purchase a new toner cartridge and use it as when needed.

When prints can no longer be made as toner runs out completely, a screen showing how to
replace the toner cartridge, like the one shown below, appears on the touch panel display.
7 Follow the instructions shown on the screen.
Routine Maintenance

If you press [Recover Later], you can continue operations, such as setting modes and scanning
originals, without replacing the toner cartridge immediately.

7-22 Replacing the Toner Cartridge

WARNING
• Do not burn or throw used toner cartridges into open flames, as this may cause the toner
remaining inside the toner cartridges to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire.
• Do not store toner cartridges in places exposed to open flames, as this may cause the toner
to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire.
• When discarding used toner cartridges, put the toner cartridges in a bag to prevent the toner
remaining inside the toner cartridges from scattering, and dispose of them in a location away
from open flames.

CAUTION
• Keep toner out of the reach of small children. If toner is ingested, consult a physician
immediately.
• Take care not to allow toner to come into contact with your hands or clothing. If toner gets
onto your hands or clothing, wash it off immediately with cold water. Washing it off with warm
water will set the toner, and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.

IMPORTANT
• Use only toner cartridge recommended for use on this machine.
• Do not replace toner cartridge until the message prompting you to do so appears.
• Do not attempt to replace the toner cartridge while the machine is printing.

NOTE
• It is recommended to replace the toner cartridge soon after the message <Prepare the toner.> appears.
• Complete instructions on how to replace the toner cartridge can be accessed by pressing [Previous] or
[Next] on the touch panel display.
• If the toner runs out during a print job, the machine will start printing the remaining pages automatically 7
after you replace the toner cartridge.

Routine Maintenance

Replacing the Toner Cartridge 7-23

 1 Open the front cover.

2 While pushing down the release tab, turn the toner cartridge in the
direction of the arrow in the illustration below.

7 Release Tab
Routine Maintenance

7-24 Replacing the Toner Cartridge

3 While pushing down the release tab, pull the toner cartridge out in the
direction of the arrow in the illustration below.

4 Rock the new toner cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner
evenly inside the cartridge.

Routine Maintenance
WARNING
Do not throw used toner cartridges into open flames, as they may ignite the toner
remaining inside the cartridge, and result in burns or a fire.

IMPORTANT
If the toner is not distributed evenly inside the cartridge, the printing quality may deteriorate.

Replacing the Toner Cartridge 7-25

 5 With the side with the label facing up, insert the new toner cartridge in
the direction of the arrow while grasping its handle.

6 Hold the toner cartridge with one hand, and remove the seal by pulling
it out with the other hand.

7
Routine Maintenance

IMPORTANT
• Pull out the seal slowly, otherwise the scattered toner may soil your clothes, etc.
• Pull out the seal completely, otherwise the print error may occur.
• Pulling the seal upwards or downwards may break the seal. If the seal could break inside the
toner cartridge and cannot be removed completely, the toner cartridge may not be used.
• Ensure seal is pulled out completely from the toner cartridge because the toner may scatter and
printing quality may deteriorate.
• Throw away the seal after removing it from the toner cartridge.

7-26 Replacing the Toner Cartridge

7 Turn the toner cartridge in the direction of the arrow.

IMPORTANT
Turn the toner cartridge fully until it locks into place.

8 Close the front cover.

Routine Maintenance
CAUTION
When closing the front cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may
result in personal injury.

IMPORTANT
Be sure to clean the fixing unit every time you replace the toner cartridge. See “Fixing Unit
Cleaning,” on p. 7-48.

Replacing the Toner Cartridge 7-27

 Drum Unit

When the drum unit is full of waste toner, the message <Waste toner is full.> appears on the
touch panel display. If you print another 100 pages after this message is displayed, messages
<Waste toner is full.> and <Replace the drum.> are displayed and you cannot print until you
replace the drum unit.

WARNING
Do not throw used drum units into open flames, as they may ignite the toner remaining inside
the unit, and result in burns or a fire.

CAUTION
If you use the machine without inserting the drum unit, <Insert the drum.> appears on the
touch panel display. In this case, turn OFF the main power, and install the drum unit into the
machine.

Replacing the Drum Unit

7 1 Press the button on the left cover of the main unit, and open the left
cover.
Routine Maintenance

CAUTION
To avoid damage to the drum unit, always open the left cover wider than 50 mm.

7-28 Drum Unit

2 Open the front cover.

3 Release the unlock lever to its horizontal position.

Routine Maintenance

Drum Unit 7-29

 4 While gripping the handle of the drum unit, pull it out slightly upward
as the illustration below.

5 Open the package of the new drum unit, and remove it from the
package.

7
Routine Maintenance

CAUTION
Do not remove the protective cover before attaching the drum unit to the machine.

7-30 Drum Unit

6 Hold the protective cover of the drum unit, and align it with the slots
inside the main unit.

7 While holding the protective cover, insert the drum unit in the direction
of the arrow in the illustration below.

Routine Maintenance
CAUTION
Be careful not to touch the blue-green part of the drum.

Drum Unit 7-31

 8 Remove the protective cover of the drum unit.

9 Lock the unlock lever to its vertical position.

7
Routine Maintenance

7-32 Drum Unit

10 Close the front cover.

CAUTION
When closing the front cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may
result in personal injury.

11 Place your hand where the hand symbol ( ) is located on the left
cover of the main unit, and then gently close the left cover until it
clicks into place in the closed position.

Routine Maintenance
CAUTION
When closing the left cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result
in personal injury.

Drum Unit 7-33

 Affixing the Counter Label for Service Technician

1 Press the (1 2 3) on the control panel to check the total count.

2 Enter the date and counter value in the drum counter label.

3 Open the front cover and affix the counter label on the drum unit.

7
Counter Label
Routine Maintenance

4 Close the front cover.

7-34 Drum Unit

Routine Cleaning

If the original is not copied clearly, clean the following parts of the machine. For high-quality
printouts, we recommend cleaning these parts once or twice a month.
• Platen glass
• Underside of the feeder/platen cover
• Feeder scanning area rollers
• White plate, roller

WARNING
• Do not use alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, or other solvents for cleaning. Doing so may
result in damage to the plastic parts.
• Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet regularly, and clean the area around the
base of the power plug’s metal pins and the power outlet with a dry cloth to ensure that all
dust and grime is removed. If the power cord is connected for a long period of time in a damp,
dusty, or smoky location, dust can build up around the power plug and become damp. This
may cause a short circuit and result in a fire.

CAUTION
Do not dampen the cloth too much, as this may damage the original or break the machine. 7

Routine Maintenance
IMPORTANT
• Sending or receiving documents cannot be done when the main power switch is OFF or the power cord
is disconnected.
• If the main power switch is turned OFF, all jobs waiting in the print queue will be erased.
• Documents received into memory and documents stored for delayed send will be retained for
approximately 60 minutes after the power cord has been disconnected.

Routine Cleaning 7-35

 Platen Glass and Underside of the Feeder/Platen Cover
Clean the platen glass and the underside of the feeder/platen cover by following the procedure
below.

WARNING
When cleaning the machine, first turn OFF the main power switch, and disconnect the power
cord. Failure to observe these steps may result in a fire or electrical shock.

IMPORTANT
If the platen glass or the underside of the feeder/platen cover is dirty, the original may not be scanned
clearly, or the size of the original may be detected incorrectly. (The iR2030/iR2025/iR2022i can detect
the size of the original placed on the platen glass.)

1 Clean the platen glass and the underside of the feeder/platen cover
with a cloth dampened with water, and then wipe them clean with a
soft, dry cloth.

7
Routine Maintenance

CAUTION
Do not dampen the cloth too much, as this may damage the original or break the
machine.

7-36 Routine Cleaning

Manual Feeder Cleaning
If your originals have black streaks or appear dirty after scanning them through the feeder, this
may be caused by pencil writing rubbing off the originals and onto the roller. Perform this feeder
cleaning procedures to clean the feeder scanning area, film, and rollers.

WARNING
When cleaning the machine, first turn OFF the main power switch, and disconnect the power
cord. Failure to observe these steps may result in a fire or electrical shock.

CAUTION
Do not dampen the cloth too much, as this may damage the original or break the machine.

IMPORTANT
• If the feeder scanning area is dirty, it may result in a paper jam or blemished print output.
• Spin the rollers while cleaning them.

NOTE
This procedure is necessary only if the feeder (DADF-P2) is attached.

1 Open the feeder cover.

7

Routine Maintenance

Routine Cleaning 7-37

 2 Clean the rollers (a total of three places) inside the feeder cover with a
cloth dampened with water. Then wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth.

3 Open the inner cover, holding it by its front tab.

Inner Cover

7
Routine Maintenance

7-38 Routine Cleaning

4 Clean the rollers (a total of three places) inside the inner cover with a
cloth dampened with water. Then wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth.

5 Clean the transparent plastic part of the inner cover with a cloth
dampened with water. Then wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth.

Routine Maintenance

Routine Cleaning 7-39

 6 Close the inner cover.

CAUTION
When closing the inner cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may
result in personal injury.

7 Close the feeder cover.

7
Routine Maintenance

CAUTION
When closing the feeder cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may
result in personal injury.

7-40 Routine Cleaning

8 Open the feeder.

9 Clean the feeder scanning area (the left side of the platen glass) and
the document feeding roller, with a cloth dampened with water. Then,
wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth.

Routine Maintenance
Feeder Scanning Area Document Feeding Roller

Routine Cleaning 7-41

 10 Close the feeder.

CAUTION
When closing the feeder, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in
personal injury.

7
Routine Maintenance

7-42 Routine Cleaning

Offset Roller Cleaning
When the offset rollers become dirty, the accuracy of paper alignment deteriorates. Perform
offset roller cleaning once a month to maintain the accuracy.

WARNING
When cleaning the machine, first turn OFF the main power switch and disconnect the power
cord. Failure to observe these steps may result in a fire or electrical shock.

NOTE
If either the optional Inner 2 Way Tray-E2 or Additional Finisher Tray-C1 is attached, we recommend
cleaning the roller after printing out to the top tray.

1 Lift the rollers slightly, and use a damp cloth to wipe the surface of the
rollers while rotating them.

Routine Maintenance
2 Wait approximately three minutes for the rollers to dry, or wipe the
roller surface dry with a soft cloth.

Routine Cleaning 7-43

 Transfer Roller Cleaning
If the backside of the printed paper is smudged, the transcription roller in the main unit may be
dirty. Should this occur, use the Transfer Roller Cleaning function to clean the transcription
roller.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Adjustment/Cleaning] ➞ [Transfer

Roller Cleaning].

NOTE
7 If the desired setting is not displayed, press [ ▼ ] or [▲ ] to scroll to the desired setting.
Routine Maintenance

7-44 Routine Cleaning

2 Press [Start].

To cancel the transfer roller cleaning, press [Cancel].

While the transfer roller is being cleaned, the screen below appears.

Routine Maintenance
The display returns to the Adjustment/Cleaning screen.

3 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.

Routine Cleaning 7-45

 Drum Cleaning
If print quality decreases, the drum in the main unit may be dirty. Should this occur, use the
Drum Cleaning function to clean the drum.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Adjustment/Cleaning] ➞ [Drum

Cleaning].

NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼ ] or [▲ ] to scroll to the desired setting.
7
Routine Maintenance

7-46 Routine Cleaning

2 Press [Start].

To cancel the drum cleaning, press [Cancel].

While the drum is being cleaned, the screen below appears.

Routine Maintenance
The display returns to the Adjustment/Cleaning screen.

3 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.

Routine Cleaning 7-47

 Fixing Unit Cleaning
If black streaks appear on the printed page, the fixing unit in the main unit may be dirty. Should
this occur, use the Fixing Unit Cleaning function to clean the fixing unit. The fixing unit should
also be cleaned each time the toner cartridge is replaced. Print the cleaning pattern on A4
paper for cleaning the fixing unit.

IMPORTANT
The cleaning pattern can only be printed on A4 paper.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Adjustment/Cleaning] ➞ [Fixing

Unit Cleaning].

7
Routine Maintenance

NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼ ] or [▲ ] to scroll to the desired setting.

7-48 Routine Cleaning

2 Press [Cleaning Sheet Print].

To cancel printing the cleaning paper, press [Cancel].

The cleaning paper is printed. You will use this paper as the cleaning paper.

Routine Maintenance

Routine Cleaning 7-49

 3 Open the stack bypass.

4 Load the cleaning paper with the printed side facing up, inserting the
white edge into the stack bypass first.

7
Routine Maintenance

7-50 Routine Cleaning

5 Select the paper size ➞ press [Next].

Select [A4].

6 Select the paper type ➞ press [OK].

Routine Maintenance
Select [Plain].

Routine Cleaning 7-51

 7 Press [Start].

If a cleaning paper jam occurs, the error indicator blinks in red. Press [Cancel] and remove the
jammed cleaning paper.
To cancel the fixing unit cleaning, press [Cancel].
While the fixing unit is being cleaned, the screen below appears.

7
Routine Maintenance

The display returns to the Adjustment/Cleaning screen.

NOTE
• Cleaning the fixing unit takes approximately 100 seconds.
• The cleaning process cannot be canceled. Please wait until it is completed.

7-52 Routine Cleaning

8 Press [Fixing Unit Cleaning] ➞ [Cleaning Sheet Print].

To cancel printing the cleaning paper, press [Cancel].

Routine Maintenance
The cleaning paper is printed.

9 Load the cleaning paper with the printed side facing down, inserting
the white edge into the stack bypass first.

10 Repeat steps 5 to 7 to clean the fixing unit.

Throw away the cleaning paper after use.

11 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.

Routine Cleaning 7-53

 Automatic Feeder Cleaning
If your originals have black streaks or appear dirty after scanning them through the feeder, clean
the rollers of the feeder by repeatedly feeding blank sheets of paper through it.

NOTE
• This procedure is necessary only if the feeder (DADF-P2) is attached.
• It takes approximately 20 seconds to clean the feeder.

1 Press (Additional Functions) ➞ [Adjustment/Cleaning] ➞ [Feeder

Cleaning].

7
Routine Maintenance

NOTE
If the desired setting is not displayed, press [▼ ] or [▲ ] to scroll to the desired setting.

7-54 Routine Cleaning

2 Place 10 sheets of blank paper into the feeder ➞ press [Start].

Make sure that you fan the sheets of paper well.

Use A4 paper.
To cancel feeder cleaning, press [Cancel].
While the feeder is being cleaned, the screen below appears.

Routine Maintenance
The display returns to the Adjustment/Cleaning screen.

3 Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.

The feeder is clean. Try scanning again.

Routine Cleaning 7-55

 Consumables

The following consumables and accessories are available from Canon. For more information,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
We recommend that you order the following consumables from your local authorized Canon
dealer before your stock runs out.

■ Paper Stock
In addition to plain paper (A3, A4, and A5), recycled paper, color paper, transparencies (recommended
for this machine), labels, and other types of paper stock are available. For more information, contact your
local authorized Canon dealer.

7
Routine Maintenance

CAUTION
Do not store paper in places exposed to open flames, as this may cause the paper to ignite
and result in burns or a fire.

IMPORTANT
To prevent moisture build-up, tightly wrap any remaining paper in its original package for storage.

NOTE
• Some commercially available paper types are not suited for this machine. Contact your local authorized
Canon dealer when you need to purchase paper.
• For high-quality printouts, use paper recommended by Canon.

7-56 Consumables
■ Toner Cartridge
If a message prompting you to replace the toner cartridge appears on the touch panel display, replace
the used toner cartridge with a new one.
Use only toner cartridges recommended for use on this machine.

WARNING
• Never dispose toner cartridges in a fire or incinerator, as this may result in an explosion.
• Do not store toner cartridges in places exposed to open flames, as this may cause the toner
to ignite and result in burns or a fire.

CAUTION
Keep toner cartridges and other consumables out of the reach of small children. If these
items are ingested, consult a physician immediately.

IMPORTANT 7
• Store toner cartridges in a cool location, away from direct sunlight. (The recommended storage

Routine Maintenance
conditions are: temperatures below 30 °C, and humidity below 80%.)
• Never store the toner cartridge in a vertical position.

■ Stamp Cartridge
The stamp cartridge is used to stamp originals. Use only the stamp cartridges recommended for use on
this machine.

Consumables 7-57
 ■ Genuine Consumables
Canon continuously develops technology innovations in Canon Toners, Drums and Cartridges,
specifically designed for use in Canon Multi-Functional machines.
Experience the benefits of optimal print performance, print volume and high quality outputs, achieved
through Canon’s new advanced technologies. Therefore, the use of Canon genuine consumables is
recommended for your Canon Multi-Functional machines.
Go to http://www.canon-europe.com/consumables/ to understand the secret behind Canon’s
Consumable products.

7
Routine Maintenance

7-58 Consumables
Troubleshooting
This chapter describes what to do in response to a paper jam in the main unit or optional units, and an
8
CHAPTER

error message screen.

Reducing the Frequency of Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Clearing Paper Jams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Screen Indicating the Locations of Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Fixing Unit (Inside the Main Unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Duplex Unit (Duplex Unit-B1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Feeder (DADF-P2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Stack Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Paper Drawer 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Paper Drawers 2, 3, and 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Finisher-U2 (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Inner 2 Way Tray-E2 (Optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Clearing Staple Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
List of Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
Self-Diagnostic Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
List of Error Codes without Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
If Memory Becomes Full during Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
Service Call Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51
Contacting Your Local Authorized Canon Dealer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51

8-1
 Reducing the Frequency of Paper Jams

If paper jams occur frequently, when there is no apparent problem with the machine, either one
of the following two reasons may be the cause. Follow the instructions described below to
reduce the frequency of paper jams.

■ There are torn pieces of paper left inside the machine.

Pulling jammed paper out of the machine by force may leave torn pieces of paper left inside, leading to
frequent paper jams. If paper tears while you are trying to remove jammed paper from the machine,
make sure that you remove the torn pieces as well.

■ The paper-size detecting lever is set incorrectly.

Make sure that the paper-size detecting lever located on the left side of a paper drawer matches the size
of the paper loaded in the paper drawer. If the paper-size detecting lever is set incorrectly, paper jams
may occur more frequently. (See “Adjusting a Paper Drawer to Hold a Different Paper Size,” on p. 7-8.)
Troubleshooting

8-2 Reducing the Frequency of Paper Jams

Clearing Paper Jams

If a paper jam occurs, the following screens appear on the touch panel display.

Screen Indicating the Locations of Paper Jams

The screen indicating the location of the paper jam and instructions on how to clear the paper
jam appears on the touch panel display. This screen repeatedly appears on the touch panel
display until the paper jam is entirely cleared.

■ Example of a Screen Indicating the Paper Jam

When a paper jam occurs, a black circle appears on the screen to indicate the location of the paper jam.
Follow the instructions on how to clear the paper jam appear along the topside of the screen.
If you press [Recover Later], you can continue operations, such as setting modes and scanning
originals, without removing the jammed paper immediately.

Troubleshooting
IMPORTANT
When a paper jam occurs in the feeder, you cannot continue operating the machine. Follow the
instructions on the touch panel display to remove the jammed paper. (See “Feeder (DADF-P2),” on
p. 8-16.)

Clearing Paper Jams 8-3

 WARNING
There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high voltages. When removing
jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow necklaces,
bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this may result in
burns or electrical shock.

CAUTION
• When removing jammed originals or paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of
the original or paper.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to cut
your hands or injure yourself on the parts on the inside of the machine. If you cannot remove
the paper, please contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to allow
the toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will
dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water.
Washing them with warm water will set the toner and make it impossible to remove the toner
stains.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove the jammed
paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and getting into your eyes or
mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and
immediately consult a physician.
• The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the machine may become hot during use. When
Troubleshooting

removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not touch the fixing
unit and its surroundings, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
• After clearing all paper jams, remove your hands from the machine immediately.
Even if the machine is not in operation, your hands, hair, or clothing may get caught in the
feed rollers, which could result in personal injury or damage if the machine suddenly starts
printing.

NOTE
8 If paper is jammed in several locations, remove the jammed paper in the order indicated on the touch
panel display.

8-4 Clearing Paper Jams

1 Inspect all paper jam locations indicated on the touch panel display,
and remove any jammed paper.
See the appropriate pages below for instructions on finding and removing jammed paper. Or,
you can follow the instructions on the touch panel display.
If jammed paper tears while it is being removed, be sure to remove any remaining pieces from
inside the machine.

IMPORTANT
If the machine’s power is turned OFF when there is a paper jam, detection of paper jams in the
paper drawers is not possible after the power is turned back ON. Clear paper jams without
turning the power OFF.

NOTE
• Some areas that are shown to have paper jams may not actually have paper jams. However,
always check all locations indicated on the touch panel display in the order that is given.
• When paper is jammed in several locations, the following image with the black circles appears on
the screen.

Troubleshooting
a
b
c

a Stack Bypass (See “Stack Bypass,” on p. 8-21.)/Fixing Unit (See “Fixing Unit (Inside
the Main Unit),” on p. 8-9.)
b Paper Drawer 1 (See “Paper Drawer 1,” on p. 8-22.) 8
c Paper Drawer 2 (See “Paper Drawers 2, 3, and 4,” on p. 8-27.)
For the iR2018i, the paper drawer 2 can be used when the optional Cassette Feeding
Module-P1 is attached to the machine.

Clearing Paper Jams 8-5

 2 If a paper jam occurs inside an optional unit, see the instructions on
the following pages.
The Cassette Feeding Module-P1 (paper drawer 2) and Cassette Feeding Module-Q1 (paper
drawer 3 and 4) are optional for the iR2018i. The Cassette Feeding Module-Q1 (paper drawer 3
and 4) is optional for the iR2030/iR2025/iR2022i.
The Duplex Unit-B1 is standard equipment for the iR2030/iR2025.
The feeder (DADF-P2) is standard equipment for the iR2022i/iR2018i.

● Cassette Feeding Module-P1/Q1

❑ See “Paper Drawers 2, 3, and 4,” on p. 8-27.
Troubleshooting

● Duplex Unit (Duplex Unit-B1)

❑ See “Duplex Unit (Duplex Unit-B1)” on p. 8-13.

8-6 Clearing Paper Jams

● Feeder (DADF-P2)
❑ See “Feeder (DADF-P2),” on p. 8-16.

● Finisher-U2
❑ See “Finisher-U2 (Optional),” on p. 8-31.

Troubleshooting
8

Clearing Paper Jams 8-7

 ● Inner 2 Way Tray-E2
❑ See “Inner 2 Way Tray-E2 (Optional),” on p. 8-36.

3 After you have removed all of the jammed paper in the locations
indicated on the touch panel display, restore all levers and covers to
their original positions.
Troubleshooting

4 Continue to follow the procedure and instructions on the touch panel

display.
Once you have removed all of the jammed paper in locations other than the feeder, printing or
copying resumes.
If there is paper that still needs to be removed, a screen indicating how to clear that paper jam
appears on the touch panel display. Repeat the procedure from step 1.
8
NOTE
You do not have to re-enter the number of copies or prints, even if you are printing multiple sets.
The machine automatically recalculates the number of copies or prints to make based on the
number of sheets that have jammed.

8-8 Clearing Paper Jams

Fixing Unit (Inside the Main Unit)
If a paper jam occurs in the fixing unit area, a screen similar to the one shown below appears on
the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the procedure
described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to remove the
jammed paper.

WARNING

Troubleshooting
There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high voltages. When removing
jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow necklaces,
bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this may result in
burns or electrical shock.

CAUTION
• The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the machine may become hot during use. When
removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not touch the fixing 8
unit and its surroundings, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
• When removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to allow
toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty
your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water.
Washing with warm water will set the toner and make it impossible to remove the toner
stains.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove the jammed
paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and getting into your eyes or
mouth. If toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and
immediately consult a physician.

Clearing Paper Jams 8-9

 1 Press the button on the left cover of the main unit, and open the left
cover.

2 Push down the green fixing lever.

Troubleshooting

CAUTION
The parts located around the exit slot guide and the fixing unit are subject to high
temperatures. When removing jammed paper, take care not to touch anything in this
area except the lever.

8-10 Clearing Paper Jams

3 Use the green tab to lift up the exit slot cover and remove any jammed
paper.

4 While holding down the lever on the right corner of the fixing unit,
open the upper cover of the fixing unit and remove any jammed paper.

Troubleshooting
8

5 Remove any jammed paper that is protruding from the lower part of the
fixing unit.

CAUTION
The parts inside the fixing unit are subject to high-temperatures. When removing
jammed paper, take care not to touch anything in this area, except the upper cover.

Clearing Paper Jams 8-11

 6 Push up the green fixing lever.

7 Place your hand where the hand symbol ( ) is located on the left
cover of the main unit, and then gently close the left cover until it
clicks into place in the closed position.
Troubleshooting

8
CAUTION
When closing the left cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result
in personal injury.

8 Follow the instructions on the touch panel display.

NOTE
The screen indicating the location of the paper jam repeatedly appears on the touch panel
display until the paper jam is entirely cleared. For more information, see “Screen Indicating the
Locations of Paper Jams,” on p. 8-3.

8-12 Clearing Paper Jams

Duplex Unit (Duplex Unit-B1)
If a paper jam occurs inside the duplex unit (Duplex Unit-B1), a screen similar to the one shown
below appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the
procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to
remove the jammed paper.

WARNING

Troubleshooting
There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high voltages. When removing
jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow necklaces,
bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this may result in
burns or electrical shock.

CAUTION
• The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the machine may become hot during use. When
removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not touch the fixing 8
unit and its surroundings, as doing so may result in burns or electrical shock.
• When removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to allow
toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty
your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water.
Washing with warm water will set the toner and make it impossible to remove the toner
stains.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove the jammed
paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and getting into your eyes or
mouth. If toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and
immediately consult a physician.

NOTE
The Duplex Unit-B1 is standard equipment for the iR2030/iR2025.

Clearing Paper Jams 8-13

 1 Press the button on the left cover of the main unit, and open the left
cover.

2 Remove any jammed paper.

Troubleshooting

CAUTION
Some parts of the duplex unit (Duplex Unit-B1) are subject to high temperature. When
removing jammed paper, take care not to touch anything in this unit.

NOTE
When removing the jammed paper from the bottom of the duplex unit (Duplex Unit-B1), pull the
jammed paper slightly toward the inside. Do not pull the jammed paper right below.

8-14 Clearing Paper Jams

3 Place your hand where the hand symbol ( ) is located on the left
cover of the main unit, and then gently close the left cover until it
clicks into place in the closed position.

CAUTION
When closing the left cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result
in personal injury.

Troubleshooting
Follow the instructions on the touch panel display.

NOTE
The screen indicating the location of the paper jam repeatedly appears on the touch panel
display until the paper jam is entirely cleared. For more information, see “Screen Indicating the
Locations of Paper Jams,” on p. 8-3.

Clearing Paper Jams 8-15

 Feeder (DADF-P2)
If a paper jam occurs in the feeder, a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the
touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the procedure described
below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to remove the jammed paper.

WARNING
Troubleshooting

There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high voltages. When removing
jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow necklaces,
bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this may result in
burns or electrical shock.

CAUTION
When removing jammed originals, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the
originals.
8
IMPORTANT
The feeder (DADF-P2) is standard equipment for the iR2022i/iR2018i.

8-16 Clearing Paper Jams

1 Open the feeder cover.

2 Remove any jammed originals.

Troubleshooting
IMPORTANT
8
Do not pull the jammed original forcefully. Doing so may tear the original.

Clearing Paper Jams 8-17

 3 Open the inner cover, holding it by its front tab.

Inner Cover

4 Turn the feed dial, and remove any jammed originals.

Troubleshooting

NOTE
8 If you cannot remove the original, proceed to step 5.

8-18 Clearing Paper Jams

5 Close the inner cover.

CAUTION
When closing the inner cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may
result in personal injury.

6 Close the feeder cover.

Troubleshooting
8

CAUTION
When closing the feeder cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may
result in personal injury.

Clearing Paper Jams 8-19

 7 Open the feeder, and remove any jammed originals.

8 Close the feeder.

Troubleshooting

CAUTION
8 When closing the feeder, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in
personal injury.

9 Follow the instructions on the touch panel display.

NOTE
The screen indicating the location of the paper jam repeatedly appears on the touch panel
display until the paper jam is entirely cleared. For more information, see “Screen Indicating the
Locations of Paper Jams,” on p. 8-3.

8-20 Clearing Paper Jams

Stack Bypass
If a paper jam occurs inside the stack bypass, a screen similar to the one shown below appears
on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the procedure
described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to remove the
jammed paper.

CAUTION

Troubleshooting
When removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper.

1 Remove all paper from the stack bypass.

2 Remove any jammed paper.

8

Clearing Paper Jams 8-21

 NOTE
If you cannot remove the jammed paper, follow the procedures in “Fixing Unit (Inside the Main
Unit),” on p. 8-9.

3 Follow the instructions on the touch panel display.

NOTE
The screen indicating the location of the paper jam repeatedly appears on the touch panel
display until the paper jam is entirely cleared. For more information, see “Screen Indicating the
Locations of Paper Jams,” on p. 8-3.

Paper Drawer 1
If a paper jam occurs inside paper drawer 1, a screen similar to the one shown below appears
on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the procedure
described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to remove the
jammed paper.
Troubleshooting

WARNING
There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high-voltages. When removing
jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow necklaces,
bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this may result in
burns or electrical shock.

8-22 Clearing Paper Jams

CAUTION
• The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the machine may become hot during use. When
removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not touch the fixing
unit and its surroundings, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
• When removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to allow
toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty
your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water.
Washing with warm water will set the toner and make it impossible to remove the toner
stains.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove the jammed
paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and getting into your eyes or
mouth. If toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and
immediately consult a physician.

1 Press the button on the left cover of the main unit, and open the left
cover.

Troubleshooting
8

2 Open the paper drawer’s left cover.

Clearing Paper Jams 8-23

 3 Remove any jammed paper.

4 Pull out the paper drawer and remove any jammed paper.
Troubleshooting

8-24 Clearing Paper Jams

5 Gently push the paper drawer back into the machine until it clicks into
place in the closed position.

CAUTION
When returning the paper drawer to its original position, be careful not to get your
fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.

Troubleshooting
Close the paper drawer’s left cover.

CAUTION
When closing the paper drawer’s left cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught,
as this may result in personal injury.

Clearing Paper Jams 8-25

 7 Place your hand where the hand symbol ( ) is located on the left
cover of the main unit, and then gently close the left cover until it
clicks into place in the closed position.

CAUTION
When closing the left cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result
in personal injury.

8
Troubleshooting

Follow the instructions on the touch panel display.

NOTE
The screen indicating the location of the paper jam repeatedly appears on the touch panel
display until the paper jam is entirely cleared. For more information, see “Screen Indicating the
Locations of Paper Jams,” on p. 8-3.

8-26 Clearing Paper Jams

Paper Drawers 2, 3, and 4
If a paper jam occurs inside the paper drawers 2, 3, and 4, a screen similar to the one shown
below appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the
procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to
remove the jammed paper.

WARNING

Troubleshooting
There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high voltages. When removing
jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow necklaces,
bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this may result in
burns or electrical shock.

CAUTION
• The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the machine may become hot during use. When
removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not touch the fixing 8
unit and its surroundings, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
• When removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to allow
toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty
your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water.
Washing with warm water will set the toner and make it impossible to remove the toner
stains.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove the jammed
paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and getting into your eyes or
mouth. If toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and
immediately consult a physician.

Clearing Paper Jams 8-27

 NOTE
• Cassette Feeding Module-P1 (paper drawer 2) and Cassette Feeding Module-Q1 (paper drawer 3 and
4) are optional for the iR2018i.
• Cassette Feeding Module-Q1 (paper drawer 3 and 4) is optional for the iR2030/iR2025/iR2022i.

1 Open the paper drawer’s left cover.

Troubleshooting

2 Remove any jammed paper.

8-28 Clearing Paper Jams

3 Pull out the paper drawer and remove any jammed paper.

4 Gently push the paper drawer back into the machine until it clicks.

Troubleshooting
CAUTION
When returning the paper drawer to its original position, be careful not to get your
8
fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.

Clearing Paper Jams 8-29

 5 Close the paper drawer’s left cover.

CAUTION
When closing the left cover of the paper drawer, be careful not to get your fingers
caught, as this may result in personal injury.

6 Follow the instructions on the touch panel display.

Troubleshooting

NOTE
The screen indicating the location of the paper jam repeatedly appears on the touch panel
display until the paper jam is entirely cleared. For more information, see “Screen Indicating the
Locations of Paper Jams,” on p. 8-3.

8-30 Clearing Paper Jams

Finisher-U2 (Optional)
If a paper jam occurs in the Finisher-U2, a screen similar to the one shown below appears on
the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the procedure
described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to remove the
jammed paper.

WARNING

Troubleshooting
There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high voltages. When removing
jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow necklaces,
bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this may result in
burns or electrical shock.

CAUTION
• The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the machine may become hot during use. When
removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not touch the fixing 8
unit and its surroundings, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
• When removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to allow
the toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will
dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water.
Washing them with warm water will set the toner, and make it impossible to remove the toner
stains.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove the jammed
paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and getting into your eyes or
mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and
immediately consult a physician.

Clearing Paper Jams 8-31

 1 If you see the jammed paper, remove it.

2 Press the button on the left cover of the main unit, and open the left
cover.
Troubleshooting

8-32 Clearing Paper Jams

3 Push down the green fixing lever.

WARNING
The parts located around the exit slot guide and the fixing unit are subject to high
temperature. When removing jammed paper, take care not to touch anything in this
area except the lever.

Troubleshooting
Holding the green knob, lift the inner guide.

Clearing Paper Jams 8-33

 5 Remove any jammed paper under the inner guide.

CAUTION
Be careful not to touch the inside of the machine because some parts get very hot.

6 Push up the green fixing lever.

Troubleshooting

8-34 Clearing Paper Jams

7 Place your hand where the hand symbol ( ) is located on the left
cover of the main unit, and then gently close the left cover until it
clicks into place in the closed position.

CAUTION
When closing the left cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result
in personal injury.

Troubleshooting
Follow the instructions on the touch panel display.

NOTE
The screen indicating the location of the paper jam repeatedly appears on the touch panel
display until the paper jam is entirely cleared. For more information, see “Screen Indicating the
Locations of Paper Jams,” on p. 8-3.

Clearing Paper Jams 8-35

 Inner 2 Way Tray-E2 (Optional)
If a paper jam occurs inside the Inner 2 Way Tray-E2, a screen similar to the one shown below
appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the
procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to
remove the jammed paper.

WARNING
Troubleshooting

There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high-voltages.
When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow
necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this may
result in burns or electrical shock.

CAUTION
• The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the machine may become hot during use. When
8 removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not touch the fixing
unit and its surroundings, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
• When removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to allow
the toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will
dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water.
Washing them with warm water will set the toner, and make it impossible to remove the toner
stains.
• When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove the jammed
paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and getting into your eyes or
mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and
immediately consult a physician.

8-36 Clearing Paper Jams

1 If you see the jammed paper, remove it.

2 Press the button on the left cover of the main unit, and open the left
cover.

Troubleshooting
8

Clearing Paper Jams 8-37

 3 Push down the green fixing lever.

CAUTION
The parts located around the exit slot guide and the fixing unit are subject to high
temperature. When removing jammed paper, take care not to touch anything in this
area except the lever.

4
Troubleshooting

Holding the green knob, lift the inner guide.

8-38 Clearing Paper Jams

5 Remove any jammed paper.

CAUTION
Be careful not to touch the inside of the machine because some parts get very hot.

6 Push up the green fixing lever.

Troubleshooting
8

Clearing Paper Jams 8-39

 7 Place your hand where the hand symbol ( ) is located on the left
cover of the main unit, and then gently close the left cover until it
clicks into place in the closed position.

CAUTION
When closing the left cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result
in personal injury.

8
Troubleshooting

Follow the instructions on the touch panel display.

NOTE
The screen indicating the location of the paper jam repeatedly appears on the touch panel
display until the paper jam is entirely cleared. For more information, see “Screen Indicating the
Locations of Paper Jams,” on p. 8-3.

8-40 Clearing Paper Jams

Clearing Staple Jams

If the machine does not staple even though you have set the staple mode, a staple jam may
have occurred in the stapler unit. A screen similar to the one shown below appears on the touch
panel display. Check the location of the staple jam, and follow the procedure described below,
and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to remove any jammed staples.

Troubleshooting
IMPORTANT
Make sure to close all covers and drawers of the machine before clearing any staple jams.

Clearing Staple Jams 8-41

 1 Open the front cover of the finisher.

2 Pull out the staple case, holding the tab as illustrated below.
Troubleshooting

8-42 Clearing Staple Jams

3 Push down the tab of the staple case.

4 Remove all of the staples that slide from the staple case.

Troubleshooting
8

Clearing Staple Jams 8-43

 5 Return the tab of the staple case to its original position.

6 Push the staple case back firmly into the finisher.

Troubleshooting

8-44 Clearing Staple Jams

7 Close the front cover of the finisher.

CAUTION
When closing the front cover of the finisher, be careful not to get your fingers caught,
as this may result in personal injury.

NOTE
If there are no staples ready for stapling after the cover is closed, the stapler unit automatically
performs a “dry” stapling operation to reposition the staples.

Troubleshooting
8

Clearing Staple Jams 8-45

 List of Error Messages

This section explains the various messages that appear on the touch panel display, along with
possible causes and remedies.
For explanations of messages that are not listed here, see the Sending and Facsimile Guide
and the Network Guide.

Self-Diagnostic Display
If the machine displays a self-diagnostic error message, follow the instructions on the touch
panel display.
Self-diagnostic error messages appear on the touch panel display when:
• scanning or printing cannot be performed because of an operational error.
Troubleshooting

• you need to make a decision or take some action during scanning, copying, or printing.
• you need to make a decision or take some action while browsing the network.
The following is a list of self-diagnostic error messages, along with their possible causes and
remedies.

A4 Load Paper.

8 Cause The optimum paper size selected by the Automatic Paper Selection mode is not available in
the machine.

Remedy Load the indicated paper size into the machine. If you press (Start) while this message is
displayed, prints are made with the currently selected paper size.

Remedy 1 If the message continues to be displayed even if the indicated paper size is loaded, set
Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen)
for that paper drawer to ‘On’. (See “Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer Switching,” on
p. 4-27.)

Check your document.

Cause Paper or originals are jammed.

Remedy Remove the jammed paper or originals. (See “Clearing Paper Jams” on p. 8-3, and “Feeder
(DADF-P2)” on p. 8-16.)

Load Paper.

Cause 1 The machine has run out of paper. No more prints can be made.

Remedy Load paper. (See “Paper Drawers,” on p. 7-2.)

Cause 2 The paper drawer is not inserted correctly.

Remedy Insert the paper drawer properly. (See “Paper Drawers,” on p. 7-2.)

8-46 List of Error Messages

 Place the original on the platen glass.

Cause The specified mode requires that the original be placed on the platen glass, but there is no
original on the platen glass.

Remedy Place the original on the platen glass.

Platen Glass is dirty.

Cause The feeder’s scanning area is dirty.

Remedy Clean the feeder’s scanning area. (See “Manual Feeder Cleaning,” on p. 7-37.)

Remove the original from the feeder.

Cause The machine cannot scan your original using the feeder. An original is placed in the feeder
and on the platen glass.

Remedy Remove the original from the feeder.

Remove the paper from the output tray.

Troubleshooting
Cause Prints from the previous job remain in the output tray.

Remedy Remove the prints remaining in the output tray. Printing automatically resumes.

Replace the toner.

Cause Printing is not possible because the toner has run out.

Remedy Replace the toner cartridge. (See “Replacing the Toner Cartridge,” on p. 7-22.) 8
Return page 1 to the top, and then press the Start key.

Cause Scanning was stopped due to a problem with the feeder.

Remedy Arrange the originals in page order with the first page on top. Place the originals back into the
feeder’s original supply tray, and press (Start).

Waste toner is full./Replace the drum.

Cause The drum unit is filled with waste toner.

Remedy Replace the drum unit. (See “Replacing the Drum Unit,” on p. 7-28.)

List of Error Messages 8-47

 List of Error Codes without Messages
If a job or operation does not complete successfully, check the error code, and perform the
necessary operations according to the error code displayed. You can check the error code on
the Details screen when you press [Log] on the System Monitor screen. (See “Copy/Print Job
Details,” on p. 5-9.)
If a send, receive, or fax job does not complete successfully, the error code is printed in the
Results column on the Activity Report and TX Report. (See Chapter 11, “Printing
Communication Reports,” in the Sending and Facsimile Guide.)
Perform the necessary procedures according to the error code.

NOTE
If a send job is canceled, “STOP” is printed in the Results column on the TX Report.

# 001

Cause Paper or originals are jammed.

Remedy Remove any jammed paper or originals. (See “Clearing Paper Jams,” on p. 8-3, and “Feeder
(DADF-P2),” on p. 8-16.)
Troubleshooting

# 009

Cause 1 There is no paper.

Remedy Load paper. (See “Paper Drawers,” on p. 7-2.)

Cause 2 The paper drawer is not inserted correctly.

8
Remedy Insert the paper drawer properly. (See “Paper Drawers,” on p. 7-2.)

# 037

Cause Documents could not be received because there was insufficient memory available.

Remedy Erase unnecessary documents and documents with errors from memory to increase the
amount of available memory. (See Chapter 7, “Checking/Changing the Send/Receive
Status,” in the Sending and Facsimile Guide.)

8-48 List of Error Messages

# 701

Cause The specified Department ID does not exist, or the password has changed.

Remedy Enter the correct Department ID or password using - (numeric keys) on the control
panel, and try again. (See “Entering the Department ID and Password,” on p. 2-25.)

# 749

Cause You could not execute the job because a service call message is being displayed.

Remedy Turn the main power OFF, wait for 10 seconds, and turn the main power back ON. If the
machine still does not work normally, turn the main power OFF, disconnect the machine, and
contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

# 816

Cause You cannot print because the set page limit total has been reached.

Remedy Contact your System Manager.

# 852

Troubleshooting
Cause An error occurred because the main power switch was turned OFF while a job was being
processed.

Remedy Check to see if the main power switch is turned ON. Try processing the job again, if
necessary.

List of Error Messages 8-49

 If Memory Becomes Full during Scanning

If memory becomes full during the scanning of originals, the following screens appear on the
touch panel display.

NOTE
The jobs may not be accepted even if [Avail. Memory] on the [Device] tab of the [System Monitor]
screen has not reached zero percent.

1 Check the message on the touch panel display, and press [OK].
Troubleshooting

8
The display returns to the Basic Features screen. Scan the job again when the current job is
complete.

8-50 If Memory Becomes Full during Scanning

Service Call Message

If a malfunction occurs and the machine cannot operate normally, a screen like the one shown
below is displayed. Follow the instructions that appear on the touch panel display.

Contacting Your Local Authorized Canon Dealer

If a message like the one shown below appears, follow the procedure described below.

Troubleshooting
WARNING
8
Do not connect or disconnect the power cord with wet hands, as this may result in electrical
shock.

CAUTION
Always grasp the power plug portion when disconnecting the power cord. Pulling on the
power cord may expose or snap the core wire, or otherwise damage the power cord. If the
power cord is damaged, this could cause an electricity leak and result in a fire or electrical
shock.

IMPORTANT
• Sending or receiving documents cannot be done when the main power switch is OFF or the power cord
is disconnected.
• If the main power switch is turned OFF, all jobs waiting in the print queue will be erased.
• Documents received into memory and documents stored for delayed send will be retained for
approximately 60 minutes after the power cord has been disconnected.

Service Call Message 8-51

 1 Turn the main power switch OFF. Allow at least 10 seconds before
turning the main power switch back ON.

2 If the machine still does not operate normally, follow the procedure
below, and then contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
❑ Turn OFF the main power.
Troubleshooting

❑ Disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet.

NOTE
When contacting your local authorized Canon dealer, check the following:
- Model name
- Problems and status of the machine
- Error code on the touch panel display

8-52 Service Call Message

Appendix
This chapter provides the specifications of the main unit, optional equipment, and other useful information.
9
CHAPTER

Report Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Users Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Department ID List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Main Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Feeder (DADF-P2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Cassette Feeding Module-P1 (Optional for the iR2018i) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Cassette Feeding Module-Q1 (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Finisher-U2 (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Duplex Unit (Duplex Unit-B1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Inner 2 Way Tray-E2 (Optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Card Reader-E1 (Optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Relationship between Original Orientation and Preprinted Paper Output Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

9-1
 Report Samples

You can print the contents of the machine settings. The following lists can be printed:

Users Data List

30/06 2007 10:50 FAX 123XXXXXX 0001

***************************
*** USER’S DATA LIST ***
***************************

1. COMMON SETTINGS
INITIAL FUNCTION
SELECT INITIAL FUNCTION COPY
SET SYSTEM MONITOR SCREEN OFF
SET DEFAULT SYSTEM MONITER DEVICE ON
AUTO CLEAR SETTING INITIAL FUNCTION
AUDIBLE TONES
ENTRY TONE ON
VOLUME 1
ERROR TONE ON
VOLUME 1
OFF

Cassette feeding Module-Q1

Duplex Unit-B1
UFR ll LT Printer Kit-W1
Super G3 FAX Board-AA1
PCL Printer Kit-W1
Appendix

iR 256MB ExpansionRAM-D1
OPTION ROM 32MB
TOTAL MEMORY 256MB

9 Department ID List

9-2 Report Samples

Specifications

Specifications are subject to change without notice for product improvement or future release.

Main Unit
Item Specification
Name Canon iR2030/iR2025/iR2022i/iR2018i
Type Desktop
Platen Type Stationary
Photoconductive Material OPC (Organic Photo Conductor)
Copying System Indirect electrostatic copying
Developing System Single component dry toner projection development
Fixing System On-demand fusing
Reading: 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Resolution
Printing: 1,200 dpi x 1,200 dpi

Appendix
Number of Tones 256
Paper Drawer:

64 to 90 g/m2 Plain, Recycled, Color, Bond, Heavy

Paper Stock Stack Bypass:
9
64 to 128 g/m2 Plain, Recycled, Color, Bond, Heavy, Transparency,
Labels, Envelopes (ISO-B5, ISO-C5, COM10, DL, and Monarch)
Capacity Per Tray 250 sheets
Acceptable Originals Sheet, book, 3-dimensional objects (up to 40 mm or 2 kg)
Maximum Original Size 297 mm x 432 mm
Paper Drawer:
A3, A4, A4R, and A5

Paper Sizes Stack Bypass:

A3, A4, A4R, A5, A5R, Irregular size (95 mm x 148 mm to 297 mm x
432 mm), and Envelopes (ISO-B5, ISO-C5, COM10, DL, and
Monarch)
Top Margin: 3.0 mm± 2.0 mm
Margin Areas
Left Margins: 3.0 mm± 2.0 mm

Specifications 9-3
 Item Specification
26 seconds maximum after powering ON
Warm-Up Time
Activation time may vary depending on the conditions under which the
machine is being used. (In all cases, at a room temperature of 20 °C)
First Print Time 6.9 seconds (A4, direct, paper drawer 1)
Sheets per minute
iR2018i iR2022i iR2025 iR2030
1:1
Copy Speed
(Except when paper is fed A3 15 15 15 15
from the stack bypass)
A4 18 22 25 30
A4R 11 11 11 11
A5 25 25 25 25
Direct 1:1 (±0.5%)
Reduction 1:0.70 (A3 ➞ A4)
Magnification 1:0.50 (A3 ➞ A5)
Enlargement 1:1.41 (A4 ➞ A3)
1:2.00 (A5 ➞ A3)
Paper Drawers:
iR2030/iR2025/iR2022i: 250 sheets x 2 drawers (80 g/m2)
iR2018i: 250 sheets x 1 drawer (80 g/m2)
Appendix

Stack Bypass:
Paper Feeding System
80 sheets (A4/A4R/A5R/A5, 80 g/m2)
50 sheets (A3, 80 g/m2)
50 sheets (Transparencies/Heavyweight paper, 91 to 128 g/m2)
9 10 envelopes
1 sheet (Labels)
Output Orientation Face Down
Density Control Automatic or manual (9 levels)
Multiple Copies 1 to 99 sheets
Power Source 220 V AC - 240 V AC ±10%, 50/60 Hz,
Maximum Power
Approx. 1.5 kW max.
Consumption
622 mm × 676 mm × 672 mm (iR2018i)
622 mm × 676 mm × 757 mm (iR2022i)
Dimensions (W x D x H)
622 mm × 638 mm × 665.4 mm (iR2025/iR2030:a platen cover attached)
622 mm × 676 mm × 757 mm (iR2025/iR2030:a feeder attached)
920 mm × 676 mm (iR2018i/iR2022i/iR2025/iR2030: a feeder attached
Installation Space and when the stack bypass is extended)
(W x D) 920 mm × 638 mm (iR2025/iR2030: a platen cover attached and when
the stack bypass is extended)

9-4 Specifications
 Item Specification
47.0 kg (iR2018i)
53.0 kg (iR2022i)
Weight
47.0 kg (iR2025/iR2030:a platen cover attached)
53.0 kg (iR2025/iR2030:a feeder attached)

Feeder (DADF-P2)
Item Specification
Type Automatic Document Feeder
Originals A3, A4, A4R, A5, A5R

52 g/m2 to 105 g/m2 (One-page scanning for 37 g/m2 to 52 g/m2 and

Original Paper Weight
105 g/m2 to 128 g/m2)

A4/A4R/A5/A5R: 50 sheets (80 g/m2)

Original Tray Capacity
A3: 25 sheets (80 g/m2)
Original Scanning Speed 20 sheets/minute (A4)
Power Source From main unit
Power Consumption Approx. 26 W max.
Dimensions (W x D x H) 565 mm × 489.4 mm × 122 mm
Weight Approx. 7.0 kg

Appendix
9

Specifications 9-5
 Cassette Feeding Module-P1 (Optional for the iR2018i)
Item Specification
Paper sizes A3, A4, A4R, A5
Paper capacity 250 sheets x 1 drawer (80 g/m2)
Power source From main unit
Power consumption Approx. 4 W max.
Dimensions (W x D x H) 580.3 mm x 569.3 mm x 116.8 mm
Weight Approx. 6.0 kg

Cassette Feeding Module-Q1 (Optional)

Item Specification
Paper Sizes A3, A4, A4R, A5
Paper Feeding System 250 sheets x 2 cassettes (80 g/m2)
Power Source From main unit
Power Consumption Approx. 14 W max.
Dimensions (W x D x H) 580.3 mm x 569.3 mm x 201.8 mm
Appendix

Weight Approx. 12 kg

9-6 Specifications
Finisher-U2 (Optional)
Item Specification
Paper Weight 64 to 128 g/m2
Standard type
Non-collate
A4/A5/A5R: 770 sheets or 100 mm
A4R/A3: 380 sheets or 50 mm
Collate mode
A4: 770 sheets or 100 mm
A4R/A3: 380 sheets or 50 mm
Staple mode
A4: 30 sets or 100 mm
A4R/A3: 30 sets or 50 mm
Capacity Per Tray
Additional Finisher Tray-C1 is attached
Non-collate
A4/A5/A5R: 200 sheets or 26 mm
A4R/A3: 150 sheets or 20 mm
Collate mode
A4: 200 sheets or 26 mm

Appendix
A4R/A3: 150 sheets or 20 mm
Staple mode
A4: 30 sets or 26 mm
A4R/A3: 30 sets or 20 mm
9
A4: 50 sheets (64 to 80 g/m2)
Max. Stapling Capacity/
A3, A4R: 30 sheets (64 to 80 g/m2)
Available Staple Size
* Corner Staple only
Available Staple Size A3/A4/A4R
Available Offset Size A3/A4/A4R
Power Source From main unit
Power Consumption Approx. 46 W max.
Dimensions (W x D x H) 480 mm × 520 mm × 300 mm
1102 mm × 676 mm (iR2018i/iR2022i/iR2025/iR2030: a feeder
attached and when the stack bypass and the auxiliary tray of the
Installation Space Additional Finisher Tray-C1 is extended)
(W x D) 1102 mm × 638 mm (iR2025/iR2030: a platen cover attached and
when the stack bypass and the auxiliary tray of the Additional Finisher
Tray-C1 is extended)
Weight Approx. 10 kg

Specifications 9-7
 Duplex Unit (Duplex Unit-B1)
Item Specifications
Paper sizes A3, A4, A4R, A5R
Paper weight 64 g/m2 to 90 g/m2
Power source From main unit
Power consumption Approx. 21 W max.
Dimensions (W x D x H) 437.2 mm × 448 mm × 378.3 mm
Weight Approx. 2.5 kg

Inner 2 Way Tray-E2 (Optional)

Item Specifications

A4/A5/A5R: 100 sheets (80 g/m2)

Capacity
A3/A4R: 50 sheets (80 g/m2)
Power Source From main unit
Power Consumption Approx. 5 W max.
Dimensions (W x D x H) 485.5 mm × 451 mm × 151.2 mm
Installation Space
Appendix

Incorporated in the main unit

(D x W)
Weight Approx. 1.5 kg

9 Card Reader-E1 (Optional)

Item Specifications
Available Cards Magnetic type card, Optical type card
Card Readout Method Magnetic/Optical readout
Magnetic Card Reading
Inserting Direction
Direction
Store/Replay Replay
Power Source From main unit
Dimensions (W x D x H) 88 mm x 100 mm x 32 mm
Weight Approx. 295 g

9-8 Specifications
Relationship between Original Orientation and
Preprinted Paper Output Chart

Please use this chart when printing on preprinted paper (i.e., paper with logos).

IMPORTANT
Do not load the following types of paper into the paper drawers, as this may cause paper jams:
- Paper on which color images have been copied (do not copy on the reverse side either).

NOTE
If you want to copy on the back side of preprinted paper, place the side you want to
copy on:
- face up when using a paper drawer
- face down when using the stack bypass

■ If You Want to Set Stapling:

Staple
Corner: Top Left Corner: Top Left Corner: Top Left
Position
Confidential Confidential Confidential

Output
Example
Original/
Paper

Appendix
Orientation,
Settings A4 A4R A3
Confidential

Orientation in
paper drawer
Preprinted Paper

Confidential
Confidential
Preprinted side: Confidential

Face up
Orientation in stack 9
laitnedifnoC

bypass
Confidential
Confidential
Preprinted side: Confidential

Face down

Orientation on
the platen glass
Original side:
Face down
Original

Orientation in
the feeder
Original side:
Face up

Either On or Off (Set to ‘On’

Auto Orientation Setting Either On or Off when paper orientation in the Either On or Off
stack bypass/paper drawer
is vertical.)

NOTE
When the Auto Orientation setting is turned to ‘On’, the staple positions may be different from shown
above. To staple on the top left position of the output, match the orientation of the originals and paper to
be loaded in the machine.

Relationship between Original Orientation and Preprinted Paper Output Chart 9-9
 ■ If You Do Not Want to Set Stapling:

Output
Example Confidential Confidential Confidential

Original/
Paper
Orientation, A4 A4R A3
Settings

Confidential
Orientation in
paper drawer
Preprinted Paper

Confidential
Confidential
Preprinted side: Confidential

Face up
Orientation in stack

laitnedifnoC
bypass
Confidential
Confidential
Preprinted side: Confidential

Face down

Orientation on
the platen glass
Original side:
Face down
Original

Orientation in
the feeder
Original side:
Face up

Either On or Off (Set to ‘On’

when paper orientation in the Either On or Off
Auto Orientation Setting Either On or Off stack bypass/paper drawer
is vertical.)
Appendix

9-10 Relationship between Original Orientation and Preprinted Paper Output Chart
Index

A C
Additional Finisher Tray-C1 Canceling Copy/Print Jobs, 5-11
About Additional Finisher Tray-C1, 3-3, 3-12 Card Reader-E1
Specifications, 9-7 About the Card Reader-E1, 3-3, 3-19
Additional Functions After using the machine, 3-21
Address book settings, 4-14 Before using the machine, 3-20
Adjustment/Cleaning, 4-7 Department ID Management, 3-22
Common Settings, 4-5 Specifications, 9-8
Communications Settings, 4-12 Cassette Feeding Module-P1
Copy Settings, 4-12 About the Cassette Feeding Module-P1, 3-3, 3-8
Printer settings, 4-13 FL cassette-AF1, 3-9
Report Settings, 4-8 Paper drawers, 3-8
System Settings, 4-9 Parts and their functions, 3-8
Timer Settings, 4-7 Specifications, 9-6
Additional Functions key, 1-15 Cassette Feeding Module-Q1
Additional Functions screen, 2-7, 4-4 About the Cassette Feeding Module-Q1, 3-3, 3-8
Address Book Password, 4-11, 6-38 FL cassette-AF1, 3-9
Address Book Settings, 4-14 Paper drawers, 3-8
Parts and their functions, 3-8
Adjusting/Cleaning the machine Specifications, 9-6
Adjustment/Cleaning, 4-7 Checking Job Status, 5-3

Appendix
Automatic feeder cleaning, 7-54
Checking the Counter, 5-2
Cleaning the machine, 7-35
Manual feeder cleaning, 7-37 Checking the Log, 6-50
Offset Roller Cleaning, 7-43 Cleaning
Rotate Collate Adjustment, 4-82
Setting the Bond Special Fixing Mode, 4-78 Automatic feeder cleaning, 7-54
Special Mode M, 4-70 Cleaning the machine, 7-35
Special Mode N, 4-72 Drum cleaning, 7-46 9
Special Mode O, 4-74 Manual feeder cleaning, 7-37
Special Mode P, 4-76 Offset Roller Cleaning, 7-43
Special Mode S, 4-80 Platen glass and cover, 7-36
Fixing Unit Cleaning, 7-48
Allow Fax Driver TX, 4-11, 6-42 Transfer roller cleaning, 7-44
Audible Tones, 4-20 Clearing Page Totals, 6-26
Auto Adjustment for Dirty Feeder, 4-84 Clear key, 1-15
Auto Clear, 2-12 Collate
Auto Clear Time, 4-67 Finisher-U2, 3-13
Auto Drawer Switching, 2-12, 4-27 Inner 2 Way Tray-E2, 3-17
Auto Online/Offline, 6-59 Color paper, 2-56
Auto Orientation, 2-14 Common Settings
Auto Paper Selection, 4-27 About Common Settings, 4-5, 4-15
Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer Switching, 4-27
Auto Sleep mode, 4-65 Changing the language shown on the touch panel
Auto Sleep Time, 4-65 display, 4-47
Data Compression Ratio for Remote Scans, 4-53
Default display after Auto Clear, 4-18
Displaying the error message of the feeder, 4-51
B Energy consumption in the Sleep mode, 4-33
Identifying the type of paper in a paper source, 4-30
Inch entry, 4-25
Bond Special Fixing Mode, 4-78 Initial function at power ON, 4-15
Brightness, adjusting, 2-18 Output tray designation, 4-35

Index 9-11
 Returning the Common Settings to their defaults, Replacing, 7-28
4-57 Duplex unit (Duplex Unit-B1), 8-13
Reversing the contrast of the touch panel display,
4-49
Setting the Gamma Value for Remote Scans, 4-55
Setting the toner save mode, 4-22
Standard paper for the stack bypass, 4-38 E
Tone settings, 4-20
Confirm Entered Fax Numbers, 4-11, 6-46 Entering characters from the touch panel display
Consumables Alphanumeric characters, 2-19
Symbols, 2-21
Paper stock, 7-56 Values in inches, 2-24
Safety instructions, xxx
Envelopes, 2-56
Stamp cartridge, 7-57
Toner cartridge, 7-57 Error Display for Dirty Feeder, 4-51
Control panel Error indicator, 1-15
About the control panel, 1-13 Error messages
Control panel power switch, 1-15 Error codes without messages, 8-48
Parts and their functions, 1-15 Self-diagnostic display, 8-46
Power, 1-16
External View, 1-13
Control panel power switch, 1-16, 1-22
Copy function, 2-2
COPY key, 1-15
Copy Settings, 4-12 F
Copying, definition, xiv
Failed Forwarding Document Set., 4-11, 6-56
Copyright, xx
Fax function, 2-3
Counter check, 5-2
Feeder (DADF-P2)
Counter check key, 1-15
About the feeder, 1-13
Current Date and Time, 4-59 Auto feeder cleaning, 7-54
Custom Fax Settings, 4-12 Clearing paper jams, 8-16
Manual feeder cleaning, 7-37
Appendix

Cutting Down Waiting Time for a Next Job, 4-80 Specifications, 9-5
Feeder cleaning, 7-54
Finisher-U2
D About the Finisher-U2, 3-3, 3-12
Clearing paper jams, 8-31
9 Data Compression Ratio for Remote Scans, 4-53 Clearing staple jams, 8-41
Finishing modes, 3-13
Daylight Saving Time, 4-62 Output tray, 3-12
Default Display after Auto Clear, 4-18 Parts and their functions, 3-12
Default Settings, 4-57 Replacing the staple cartridge, 7-17
Specifications, 9-7
Department ID and password, entering, 2-25
Finishing modes (Finisher-U2)
Department ID Management
Collate, 3-13
About Department ID Management, 3-22, 6-6 Group, 3-13
Changing the password and page limit, 3-22, 6-14 Offset, 3-13
Checking and printing counter information, 3-32, Staple, 3-14
6-22 Fixing Unit, 1-14
Clearing page totals, 3-37, 6-26
Erasing the Department ID and password, 6-19 Fixing Unit Cleaning, 7-48
Print and scan jobs with unknown ID, 3-40, 6-30 FL cassette-AF1, 3-9
Registering the Department ID, password, and page Front cover
limit, 6-7
Device Information Settings, 6-32 Finisher-U2, 3-12
Main Unit, 1-14
Different Paper Size, 7-8
Display contrast dial, 1-15
Display Dept. ID/User Name, 6-54
Displays used in this manual, xi
G
Drum cleaning, 7-46 Group
Drum unit Finisher-U2, 3-13

9-12 Index
 Inner 2 Way Tray-E2, 3-17 Trademarks, xx
License Registration, 1-24, 4-11
Loading paper
H Paper drawers, 7-2
Stack bypass, 2-41
Handling precautions, 1-10 Log In/Out key, 1-15
Heavy paper, 2-56

M
I Main power indicator, 1-15
Improving Print Quality and Density, 4-70 Main power switch, 1-13, 1-16
Illustrations used in this manual, xii Maintenance
Inch entry, 4-25 Loading paper (paper drawers), 7-2
Replacing the toner cartridge, 7-22
Initial Settings, 4-57 Replacing the stamp cartridge, 7-14
Inner 2 Way Tray-E2 Replacing the staple cartridge (Finisher-U2), 7-17
About the Inner 2 Way Tray-E2, 3-3, 3-17 Moving the machine, 1-8
Clearing paper jams, 8-36 Multifunctional operations, 2-55
Parts and their functions, 3-18
Specifications, 9-8
Tray A, 4-35
Tray B, 4-35
Installation
N
Installation space, 1-7 Numeric keys, 1-15
Location and handling, 1-2
Power supply, 1-6
Precautions, 1-2
Safety instructions, xxii
Internal View, 1-14
O

Appendix
Irregular Size, 2-42 Offset
Finisher-U2, 3-13
Optional equipment
J Card Reader-E1, 3-3, 3-19
Cassette Feeding Module-P1, 3-3, 3-8
Cassette Feeding Module-Q1, 3-3, 3-8
9
Job status, checking, 5-3
Configuration, 3-2
Job/Print status display area, 2-6 Finisher-U2, 3-3, 3-12
Inner 2 Way Tray-E2, 3-17
Original orientation, 9-9
K Output tray designation, 4-35
Overview of the machine, 2-5
Keys used in this manual, x

P
L Paper Drawer, 1-13, 1-13
Labels, 2-56 Paper drawers
Language Switch, 4-47 About the paper drawers, 7-2
Laser safety, xvi Adjusting to hold a different paper size, 7-8
Clearing paper jams, 8-22, 8-27
Left cover, 1-14 Loading paper, 7-2
Legal notices Paper drawer’s left cover, 1-14
Copyright, xx Paper jams
Disclaimers, xxi
Laser safety, xvi Clearing, 8-3
Legal limitations on the usage of your product and the Duplex unit (Duplex Unit-B1), 8-13
Feeder (DADF-P2), 8-16
use of images, xxi

Index 9-13
 Finisher-U2, 8-31 Important safety instructions, xxii
Fixing unit, 8-9 Installation, xxii
Inner 2 Way Tray-E2, 8-36 Maintenance and inspections, xxviii
Paper drawer 1, 8-22 Other warnings, xxx
Paper drawers 2, 3, and 4, 8-27 Power supply, xxiv
Reducing paper jam frequency, 8-2 SCAN key, 1-15
Screens indicating locations of paper jams, 8-3
Stack bypass, 8-21 Scanning Area, 1-14
Paper stock Scanning, definition, xiv
Acceptable paper stock, 2-56 SEND key, 1-15
Paper type, 2-56 Service call message, 8-51
Paper supply indicator, 2-13 Setting the Gamma Value for Remote Scans, 4-55
Parts and functions of the main unit Sleep mode, 4-33
Control Panel, 1-15 Special Mode M, 4-70
External view, 1-13
Internal view, 1-14 Special Mode N, 4-72
PDL Selection (PnP), 6-63 Special Mode O, 4-74
Plain paper, 2-56 Special Mode P, 4-76
Platen Cover Type J, 3-11 Special Mode S, 4-80
Platen glass, 1-14 Specifications
Power conservation Additional Finisher Tray-C1, 9-7
Cassette Feeding Module-P1, 9-6
About power conservation, 2-9 Cassette Feeding Module-Q1, 9-6
Auto Sleep mode, 4-65 Feeder (DADF-P2), 9-5
Power supply, xxiv, 1-6 Finisher-U2, 9-7
Preventing Paper Curls and Jams, 4-72 Inner 2 Way Tray-E2, 9-8
Main unit, 9-3
Preventing Paper Jams when Printing on the Back of a
Printed Paper, 4-74 Stack bypass
Print and scan jobs with unknown ID, 3-40, 6-30 About the stack bypass, 1-13
Auxiliary tray, 2-44
Print function, 2-3 Clearing paper jams, 8-21
Appendix

Print jobs Paper, 4-38

Printing, 2-41
Canceling, 2-10 Slide guide, 2-44
Checking, 2-10 Tray extension, 2-44
Printing, definition, xiv Stamp Cartridge, 7-14
Processing/Data indicator, 1-15 Standard Size, 2-42
9 Staple
Finisher-U2, 3-14
R Staple jams
Finisher-U2, 8-41
Recycled paper, 2-56 Start key, 1-15
Remote UI, 2-4, 6-36 Stop key, 1-15
Report Settings, 4-8 Symbols used in this manual, ix
Reset key, 1-15 System configuration, 3-2
Restrict New Addresses, 4-11, 6-40 System Manager Settings, 6-2
Restrict Recall, 4-11, 6-44 System manager ID, 6-4
Restrict Sequential Broadcast, 4-11, 6-48 System manager’s name, 6-4
Restricting the Send Function, 6-38 System password, 6-5
System Monitor key, 2-6
Rotate Collate Adjustment, 4-82
Routine Cleaning, 7-35 System Settings
About System Settings, 1-23, 4-9
Accepting print and scan jobs with unknown ID, 3-40,
6-30
S Auto Online/Offline, 6-59
Checking the Log, 6-50
Department ID Management, 6-6
Safety instructions Device Information Settings, 6-32
Consumables, xxx Display Dept. ID/User Name, 6-54
Handling, xxv Managing the User IDs, 6-34

9-14 Index
 PDL Selection (PnP), 6-63
Remote UI, 6-36
Restricting the Send Function, 6-38
System Manager Settings, 6-2
Use USB Device, 6-52
System Settings screen, 2-7

T
Timer Settings
About Timer Settings, 4-7, 4-59
Auto Clear Time, 4-67
Auto Sleep Time, 4-65
Current Date and Time, 4-59
Daylight saving time, 4-62
Tone settings, 4-20
Toner Cartridge
About the toner cartridge, 1-14
Replacing, 7-22
Toner Consumption, 4-22
Touch panel display
About the touch panel display, 1-15, 2-15
Changing the language, 4-47
Entering characters, 2-19
Frequently used keys, 2-15
Reversing the contrast, 4-49
Switching functions, 2-5
Touch panel key display, 2-16
Touch panel keys

Appendix
Drop-down list, 2-17
Mode ON/OFF keys, 2-16
Mode Setting keys, 2-16
Numeric keys, 2-17
Touch panel key display, 2-16
Tracing paper, 2-56
Trademarks, xx 9
Transfer Roller Cleaning, 7-44
Transparency, 2-56
Tray A, 4-35
Tray B, 4-35
Troubleshooting
Clearing paper jams, 8-3
Clearing staple jams, 8-41
Error messages, 8-46
Memory full, 8-50
Reducing the frequency of paper jams, 8-2
Service call message, 8-51

U
Unknown ID, 3-40, 6-30
USB Device, 6-52
User ID Management, 2-29, 6-34
Using Lightweight Paper, 4-76

Index 9-15
Appendix

9-16 Index
CANON INC.
30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
CANON U.S.A., INC.
One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.
CANON CANADA INC.
6390 Dixie Road Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1P7, Canada
CANON EUROPA N.V.
Bovenkerkerweg 59-61 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands
CANON FRANCE S.A.S.
17, quai du Président Paul Doumer 92414 Courbevoie Cedex, France
CANON (U.K.) LTD.
Woodhatch, Reigate, Surrey, RH2 8BF, United Kingdom
CANON DEUTSCHLAND GmbH
Europark Fichtenhain A10, 47807 Krefeld, Germany
CANON ITALIA S.p.A.
Via Milano, 8 20097 San Donato Milanese (MI) Italy
CANON ESPAÑA S.A.
Joaquín Costa, 41 28002 Madrid, Spain
CANON LATIN AMERICA, INC.
703 Waterford Way Suite 400 Miami, Florida 33126 U.S.A.
CANON AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
1 Thomas Holt Drive, North Ryde, Sydney, N.S.W. 2113, Australia
CANON CHINA CO., LTD.
15F Jinbao Building No.89 Jinbao Street, Dongcheng District, Beijing 100005, China
CANON SINGAPORE PTE. LTD.
1 HarbourFront Avenue #04-01 Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632
CANON HONGKONG CO., LTD.
19/F., The Metropolis Tower, 10 Metropolis Drive, Hunghom, Kowloon, Hong Kong

USRM1-2158-00 © CANON INC. 2007